FS-6025MFP, FS-6025MFP/B, FS-6030MFP

OPERATION GUIDE
FS-6025MFP, FS-6025MFP/B, FS-6030MFP
FS-1100
FS-1300D
Pat
er
s
s
t
r
aat106108
2300T
ur
nhout
T
el
:
014/
42.
55.
99
i
nf
o@v
anmec
hel
en.
be
www.
v
anmec
hel
en.
be
F
ax
:
014/
42.
32.
64
Introduction
Thank you for your purchase of FS-6025MFP / FS-6025MFP/B / FS-6030MFP.
This Operation Guide is intended to help you operate the machine correctly, perform routine maintenance and take a
simple troubleshooting action as necessary, so that you can always use the machine in good condition.
Please read this Operation Guide before you start using the machine.
We recommend the use of our own brand supplies. We will not be liable for any damage caused by the use of third party
supplies in this machine.
A label shown in the illustration assures that the supplies are our own brand.
In this Operation Guide, FS-6025MFP / FS-6025MFP/B are referred to as 25 ppm model, and FS-6030MFP are referred
to as 30 ppm model respectively.
The FS-6025MFP / FS-6030MFP ships standard with a document processor. The FS-6025MFP/B ships standard with
an original cover.
Included Guides
The following guides are supplied with the machine. Refer to them as necessary.
Quick Installation Guide
Describes the procedures for installation of the machine, frequently-used operations,
routine maintenance, and troubleshooting action.
Safety Guide
Provides safety and cautionary information for the installation and use of the machine.
Be sure to read this guide before using the machine.
Safety Guide (FS-6025MFP /
FS-6025MFP/B / FS-6030MFP)
Describes the machine installation space, cautionary space, and other information. Be
sure to read this guide before using the machine.
CD-ROM (Product Library)
Operation Guide (This Guide)
Describes how to load paper, basic copy, print and scan operations, and
troubleshooting.
FAX Operation Guide
Describes fax functionality.
Card Authentication Kit (B) Operation
Guide
Describes how to authenticate to the machine using the ID card.
KYOCERA COMMAND CENTER
Operation Guide
Describes how to access the machine from a computer via a Web browser to check and
change settings.
Printer Driver Operation Guide
Describes how to install the printer driver and use printer functionality.
Network FAX Driver Operation Guide
Describes how to install and use the network fax driver in order to use network fax
functionality.
KM-NET for Direct Printing Operation
Guide
Describes how to use functionality for printing PDF files without launching Adobe
Acrobat or Reader.
KMnet Viewer User Guide
Describes how to monitor the network printing system with KMnet Viewer.
PRESCRIBE Commands Technical
Reference
Describes the native printer language (PRESCRIBE commands).
PRESCRIBE Commands Command
Reference
Describes PRESCRIBE command functionality and control for each type of emulation.
Contents
1
Preface .....................................................................................................1-1
Notice ................................................................................................................................... 1-2
Safety Conventions in This Guide .............................................................................. 1-2
Environment ............................................................................................................... 1-3
Precautions for Use .................................................................................................... 1-3
Legal Restriction on Copying/Scanning ..................................................................... 1-8
Legal and Safety Information ............................................................................................... 1-9
Legal Information ....................................................................................................... 1-9
Energy Saving Control Function .............................................................................. 1-12
Automatic 2-Sided Copy Function ............................................................................ 1-12
Paper Recycling ....................................................................................................... 1-12
Energy Star (ENERGY STAR®) Program ................................................................ 1-12
About this Operation Guide ................................................................................................ 1-13
Conventions in This Guide ....................................................................................... 1-13
Originals and Paper Sizes ........................................................................................ 1-15
2
Preparation before Use ...........................................................................2-1
Part Names .......................................................................................................................... 2-2
Machine ...................................................................................................................... 2-2
Operation Panel ......................................................................................................... 2-6
Touch Panel ............................................................................................................... 2-7
Determining the Connection Method and Preparing Cables ................................................ 2-8
Connection Example .................................................................................................. 2-8
Preparing Necessary Cables ..................................................................................... 2-9
Connecting Cables ............................................................................................................. 2-10
Connecting LAN Cable ............................................................................................. 2-10
Connecting USB Cable ............................................................................................ 2-11
Connecting the Power Cable ................................................................................... 2-11
Power On/Off ...................................................................................................................... 2-12
Power On ................................................................................................................. 2-12
Power Off ................................................................................................................. 2-12
Installing Software .............................................................................................................. 2-14
Installing Printer Driver ............................................................................................. 2-14
Setting TWAIN Driver ............................................................................................... 2-18
Setting WIA Driver (Windows 7, Windows Vista and Windows Server 2008) .......... 2-19
Energy Saver function ........................................................................................................ 2-20
Low Power Mode and Auto Low Power Mode ......................................................... 2-20
Sleep and Auto Sleep .............................................................................................. 2-21
Machine Setup Wizard ....................................................................................................... 2-22
COMMAND CENTER (Settings for E-mail) ........................................................................ 2-23
Sending E-mail ......................................................................................................... 2-24
3
Common Operations ...............................................................................3-1
Loading Paper ...................................................................................................................... 3-2
Before Loading Paper ................................................................................................ 3-2
Loading Paper in the Cassettes ................................................................................. 3-3
Loading Paper in the Multi Purpose Tray ................................................................... 3-5
Loading Originals ................................................................................................................. 3-7
Placing Originals on the Platen .................................................................................. 3-7
Loading Originals in the Document Processor ........................................................... 3-8
Checking the Equipment's Serial Number .......................................................................... 3-10
Checking the Counter ......................................................................................................... 3-11
Login/Logout ....................................................................................................................... 3-12
Login ........................................................................................................................ 3-12
i
Logout ...................................................................................................................... 3-13
Favorites ............................................................................................................................. 3-14
Registering Favorites ............................................................................................... 3-14
Editing and Deleting Favorites ................................................................................. 3-17
Using Favorites ........................................................................................................ 3-19
Shortcuts ............................................................................................................................ 3-21
Registering Shortcuts ............................................................................................... 3-21
Editing and Deleting Shortcuts ................................................................................. 3-23
Using Shortcuts ........................................................................................................ 3-24
Quick Setup Wizard ............................................................................................................ 3-25
Help Screen ........................................................................................................................ 3-27
Canceling Jobs ................................................................................................................... 3-28
Using Various Functions .................................................................................................... 3-29
Common Functionality ............................................................................................. 3-30
Original Size ............................................................................................................. 3-31
Original Orientation .................................................................................................. 3-33
Mixed Size Originals ................................................................................................ 3-34
2-sided/Book Original ............................................................................................... 3-36
Continuous Scan ...................................................................................................... 3-38
Paper Selection ........................................................................................................ 3-40
Paper Output ............................................................................................................ 3-41
Collate/Offset ........................................................................................................... 3-42
Margin ...................................................................................................................... 3-44
Staple ....................................................................................................................... 3-47
Density ..................................................................................................................... 3-49
Scan Resolution ....................................................................................................... 3-50
Original Image .......................................................................................................... 3-51
Sharpness ................................................................................................................ 3-52
Background Density Adjust ...................................................................................... 3-53
Prevent Bleed-through ............................................................................................. 3-54
Zoom ........................................................................................................................ 3-55
File Format ............................................................................................................... 3-56
Color Selection ......................................................................................................... 3-58
Job Finish Notice ...................................................................................................... 3-59
File Name Entry ....................................................................................................... 3-61
Priority Override ....................................................................................................... 3-62
4
Copying ....................................................................................................4-1
Basic Operation .................................................................................................................... 4-2
Copying Functions ................................................................................................................ 4-4
Zoom .......................................................................................................................... 4-5
Duplex ........................................................................................................................ 4-8
Combine ................................................................................................................... 4-12
EcoPrint .................................................................................................................... 4-15
Auto Image Rotation ................................................................................................ 4-16
Interrupt Copy ..................................................................................................................... 4-17
5
Printing .....................................................................................................5-1
Printing from Applications ..................................................................................................... 5-2
Using a Job Box ................................................................................................................... 5-4
Private Print ................................................................................................................ 5-4
Proof and Hold Print Box ............................................................................................ 5-6
Automatic Delete Setting for Temporary Documents ................................................. 5-9
ii
6
Sending ....................................................................................................6-1
Basic Operation .................................................................................................................... 6-2
Preparation for Sending a Document to a PC ...................................................................... 6-5
Checking What to Enter for [Host Name] ................................................................... 6-5
Checking What to Enter for [Login User Name] ......................................................... 6-6
Creating a Shared Folder ........................................................................................... 6-7
Checking the [Path] .................................................................................................. 6-10
Configuring Windows Firewall (for Windows 7) ........................................................ 6-11
Specifying Destination ........................................................................................................ 6-15
Choosing from the Address Book ............................................................................ 6-15
Choosing by One Touch Key ................................................................................... 6-17
Entering a New E-mail Address ............................................................................... 6-18
Specifying a New PC Folder .................................................................................... 6-19
Checking and Editing Destinations .......................................................................... 6-22
Sending to Different Types of Destinations (Multi Sending) ..................................... 6-23
Registering Destinations in the Address Book ................................................................... 6-24
Adding a Contact ...................................................................................................... 6-24
Adding a Group ........................................................................................................ 6-28
Editing and Deleting Address Book Entries ............................................................. 6-31
Adding a Destination on One Touch Key ........................................................................... 6-33
Adding a Destination ................................................................................................ 6-33
Editing and Deleting One Touch Key ....................................................................... 6-35
Sending Functions .............................................................................................................. 6-36
Sending Size ............................................................................................................ 6-37
File Separation ......................................................................................................... 6-39
E-mail Subject/Body ................................................................................................. 6-40
FTP Encrypted TX .................................................................................................... 6-41
WSD Scan .......................................................................................................................... 6-42
Scanning using TWAIN ...................................................................................................... 6-45
7
Document Box .........................................................................................7-1
Printing Documents Stored in Removable USB Memory ..................................................... 7-2
Saving Documents to USB Memory (Scan to USB) ............................................................. 7-5
Removing USB Memory ....................................................................................................... 7-8
Functions for Document Box ................................................................................................ 7-9
Duplex ...................................................................................................................... 7-10
Encrypted PDF Password ........................................................................................ 7-11
JPEG/TIFF Print ....................................................................................................... 7-12
XPS Fit to Page ........................................................................................................ 7-13
Storing Size .............................................................................................................. 7-14
8
Status / Job Cancel .................................................................................8-1
Checking Job Status ............................................................................................................ 8-2
Details of the Status Screens ..................................................................................... 8-3
Checking Job History ........................................................................................................... 8-6
Sending the Log History ....................................................................................................... 8-7
Setting the Destination ............................................................................................... 8-8
Automatic Log History Transmission .......................................................................... 8-9
Manual Log History Transmission .............................................................................. 8-9
Setting E-mail Subject .............................................................................................. 8-10
Check of Device Status ...................................................................................................... 8-11
Checking the Remaining Amount of Toner and Paper ....................................................... 8-13
9
Setup, Registration, and User Management .........................................9-1
System Menu ....................................................................................................................... 9-2
Operation Method ...................................................................................................... 9-2
System Menu Settings ............................................................................................... 9-3
iii
Language ................................................................................................................... 9-5
Report ........................................................................................................................ 9-5
User Property ............................................................................................................. 9-7
Cassette/MP Tray Settings ........................................................................................ 9-8
Common Settings ....................................................................................................... 9-9
Copy ......................................................................................................................... 9-15
Send ......................................................................................................................... 9-15
Printer ....................................................................................................................... 9-16
System ..................................................................................................................... 9-17
Date/Timer ............................................................................................................... 9-21
Adjustment/Maintenance .......................................................................................... 9-22
User Login Administration .................................................................................................. 9-25
First User Login Administration ................................................................................ 9-25
User Login Settings .................................................................................................. 9-26
Enabling/Disabling User Login Administration ......................................................... 9-27
Local User Authorization .......................................................................................... 9-29
Adding a User .......................................................................................................... 9-30
My Panel .................................................................................................................. 9-34
Editing and Deleting Users ....................................................................................... 9-35
Simple Login ............................................................................................................ 9-38
Group Authorization ................................................................................................. 9-44
Obtain Network User Property ................................................................................. 9-48
Job Accounting ................................................................................................................... 9-50
First Job Accounting Setup ...................................................................................... 9-50
Job Accounting Settings ........................................................................................... 9-52
Enabling/Disabling Job Accounting .......................................................................... 9-53
Login/Logout ............................................................................................................ 9-54
Adding an Account ................................................................................................... 9-55
Editing and Deleting Accounts ................................................................................. 9-57
Restricting the Use of the Machine .......................................................................... 9-59
Counting the Number of Pages Printed ................................................................... 9-61
Printing an Accounting Report ................................................................................. 9-63
Job Accounting Default Setting ................................................................................ 9-64
Unknown Login User Name Job .............................................................................. 9-66
10
Troubleshooting ....................................................................................10-1
Toner Container Replacement ........................................................................................... 10-2
Waste Toner Box Replacement ......................................................................................... 10-4
Replacing Staples .............................................................................................................. 10-5
Cleaning ............................................................................................................................. 10-6
Original Cover / Glass Platen ................................................................................... 10-6
Document Processor ................................................................................................ 10-6
Solving Malfunctions .......................................................................................................... 10-8
Responding to Error Messages ........................................................................................ 10-12
Clearing Paper Jams ........................................................................................................ 10-21
Jam Location Indicators ......................................................................................... 10-21
Multi Purpose Tray ................................................................................................. 10-22
Inside the Right Cover 1 ......................................................................................... 10-22
Cassette 1 .............................................................................................................. 10-23
Inside the Right Cover 3 ......................................................................................... 10-24
Cassette 2 or 3 ....................................................................................................... 10-24
Optional Document Finisher ................................................................................... 10-25
Optional Document Finisher Staple Jam ................................................................ 10-25
Bridge Unit ............................................................................................................. 10-26
Document Processor .............................................................................................. 10-26
iv
11
Appendix ................................................................................................11-1
Optional Equipment ............................................................................................................ 11-2
Overview of Optional Equipment .............................................................................. 11-2
Paper Feeder (single cassette) ................................................................................ 11-3
Paper Feeder (double cassette) ............................................................................... 11-3
Document Finisher ................................................................................................... 11-3
FAX Kit ..................................................................................................................... 11-3
Expansion Memory .................................................................................................. 11-3
Card Authentication Kit ............................................................................................ 11-4
Gigabit Ethernet Board ............................................................................................. 11-5
Optional Function ..................................................................................................... 11-5
Character Entry Method ..................................................................................................... 11-7
Entry Screens ........................................................................................................... 11-7
Entering Characters ................................................................................................. 11-9
Paper ................................................................................................................................ 11-10
Basic Paper Specifications ..................................................................................... 11-11
Choosing the Appropriate Paper ............................................................................ 11-11
Special Paper ......................................................................................................... 11-14
Specifications ................................................................................................................... 11-18
Machine .................................................................................................................. 11-18
Printer ..................................................................................................................... 11-19
Scanner .................................................................................................................. 11-20
Document Processor .............................................................................................. 11-20
Paper Feeder (single cassette) (option) ................................................................. 11-20
Paper Feeder (double cassette) (option) ............................................................... 11-21
Document Finisher (option) .................................................................................... 11-21
Environmental Specifications ................................................................................. 11-22
Glossary ........................................................................................................................... 11-23
Index ...............................................................................................................................Index-1
Pat
er
s
s
t
r
aat106108
2300T
ur
nhout
T
el
:
014/
42.
55.
99
i
nf
o@v
anmec
hel
en.
be
www.
v
anmec
hel
en.
be
F
ax
:
014/
42.
32.
64
v
vi
Quick Guide
Be sure to read Precautions for Use before
using this machine.
To make copies
It copies.
Simply press the Start key to make copies. You can also fine-tune the copy settings by changing the
paper size, adjusting the density, etc.
To print
It prints.
You can print via a network or print a PDF file directly from USB memory.
Administrator tasks
What you want
to do
Copying with
specific settings
Printing
Documents
Stored in
Removable USB
Memory
Print via a
network
Print over
the USB
connection
Connecting
Cables
Connect the
USB cable
Network Setup
(LAN Cable
Connection)
Setup
Install the printer driver on your
computer...2-14
Loading Paper...3-2
Loading
Originals...3-7
Operation
Copying...4-2
Printing
Documents
Stored in
Removable USB
Memory...7-2
vii
Printing from Applications...5-2
To send documents
It sends.
You can send scanned images via a network. Or, you can also store scanned images in USB
memory.
Administrator tasks
What you want
to do
Send to Folder
(SMB)
Send as E-mail
Connecting Cables
Saving
Documents to
USB Memory
Plug the USB
memory
Network Setup (LAN Cable Connection)
Create a shared
folder on the
destination
computer...6-7
Setup
Editing Destination (Address Book/
Adding One Touch Keys)*...6-15
Loading Originals...3-7
Operation
*
Sending...6-2
Saving Documents
to USB Memory
(Scan to USB)...7-5
If the destination is not stored in the address book, you can send by entering the address directly.
viii
To send a FAX
It faxes.
As well as sending a FAX via the telephone lines, you can also send a FAX via a network.
NOTE
For more information on setting up and sending a FAX, refer to the FAX Operation Guide.
Administrator tasks
What you want
to do
Send a FAX
FAX directly from a computer
Connect the modular cord for the telephone line to this machine.
Selection of Telephone Line (Inch version only)
Network Setup (LAN Cable
Connection)
Setup
Install the Network FAX
Driver on your computer*
Editing Destination (Address Book/Adding One Touch Keys)**
Loading Paper...3-2
Operation
*
**
FAX Operation
Network FAX Operation
For more information, refer to the Network FAX Driver Operation Guide.
If the destination is not stored in the address book, you can send the FAX by entering the address directly.
ix
Menu Map
Copies (page 4-2)
Paper Selection (page 3-40)
Zoom (page 4-5)
Density (page 3-49)
Duplex (page 4-8)
Combine (page 4-12)
Collate/Offset (page 3-42)
Functions
Original Size (page 3-31)
Original Orientation (page 3-33)
Mixed Size Originals (page 3-34)
Paper Output (page 3-41)
Staple (page 3-47)
Original Image (page 3-51)
EcoPrint (page 4-15)
Sharpness (page 3-52)
Background Density Adj. (page 3-53)
Prevent Bleed-through (page 3-54)
Margin (page 3-44)
Continuous Scan (page 3-38)
Auto Image Rotation (page 4-16)
Job Finish Notice (page 3-59)
File Name Entry (page 3-61)
Priority Override (page 3-62)
Add/Edit Shortcut (page 3-21)
One Touch Key (page 6-17)
Address Book (page 6-15)
Ext. Address Book (refer to KYOCERA COMMAND CENTER Operation Guide)
E-mail (page 6-18)
Folder (page 6-19)
FAX (refer to Fax Operation Guide)
WSD Scan (page 6-42)
Functions
File Format (page 3-56)
Original Size (page 3-31)
Original Orientation (page 3-33)
x
Mixed Size Originals (page 3-34)
2-sided/Book Original (page 3-36)
Sending Size (page 6-37)
File Separation (page 6-39)
Scan Resolution (page 3-50)
Density (page 3-49)
Color Selection (page 3-58)
Original Image (page 3-51)
Sharpness (page 3-52)
Background Density Adj. (page 3-53)
Prevent Bleed-through (page 3-54)
FAX TX Resolution (refer to Fax Operation Guide)
Zoom (page 3-55)
Continuous Scan (page 3-38)
File Name Entry (page 3-61)
E-mail Subject/Body (page 6-40)
Job Finish Notice (page 3-59)
FTP Encrypted TX (page 6-41)
FAX Delayed Transmission (refer to Fax Operation Guide)
FAX Direct Transmission (refer to Fax Operation Guide)
FAX Polling RX (refer to Fax Operation Guide)
Add/Edit Shortcut (page 3-21)
Job Box (page 5-4)
Removable
Memory
Menu
Store File
File Format (page 3-56)
2-sided/Book Original (page 3-36)
Scan Resolution (page 3-50)
Density (page 3-49)
File Name Entry (page 3-61)
Functions
Original Size (page 3-31)
Original Orientation (page 3-33)
Mixed Size Originals (page 3-34)
Storing Size (page 7-14)
Color Selection (page 3-58)
Original Image (page 3-51)
Sharpness (page 3-52)
Background Density Adj. (page 3-53)
Prevent Bleed-through (page 3-54)
xi
Zoom (page 3-55)
Continuous Scan (page 3-38)
Job Finish Notice (page 3-59)
Add/Edit Shortcut (page 3-21)
Print
Copies (page 7-3)
Paper Selection (page 3-40)
Collate/Offset (page 3-42)
Duplex (page 7-10)
Functions
Paper Output (page 3-41)
Staple (page 3-47)
Margin (page 3-44)
Job Finish Notice (page 3-59)
Priority Override (page 3-62)
Encrypted PDF Password (page 7-11)
JPEG/TIFF Print (page 7-12)
XPS Fit to Page (page 7-13)
Add/Edit Shortcut (page 3-21)
Sub Address Box (refer to Fax Operation Guide)
Polling Box (refer to Fax Operation Guide)
Print Job Status (page 8-3)
Send Job Status (page 8-4)
Store Job Status (page 8-5)
Scheduled Job (page 8-5)
Print Job Log (page 8-6)
Send Job Log (page 8-6)
Store Job Log (page 8-6)
Scanner (page 8-11)
Printer (page 8-11)
FAX (page 8-11)
Toner Status (page 8-13)
Paper Status (page 8-13)
Removable Memory (page 8-11)
USB Keyboard (page 8-11)
Staple (page 8-13)
xii
Quick Setup Wizard
(page 3-25)
FAX Setup (page 3-25)
Paper Setup (page 3-25)
Energy Saver Setup (page 3-25)
Language (page 9-5)
Report (page 9-5)
Report Print (page 9-5)
Status Page (page 9-5)
Font List (page 9-5)
Network Status (page 9-5)
Service Status (page 9-6)
Account List (page 9-6)
Sub Address Box List (refer to Fax Operation Guide)
FAX List (Index) (refer to Fax Operation Guide)
FAX List (No.) (refer to Fax Operation Guide)
Outgoing FAX Report (refer to Fax Operation Guide)
Incoming FAX Report (refer to Fax Operation Guide)
Admin Report Settings (refer to Fax Operation Guide)
Result Report Setting
(page 9-6)
Send Result Report (page 9-6)
RX Result Report (refer to Fax Operation Guide)
Job Finish Notice Setting (page 9-6)
Send Log History (page
8-7)
Sending Log History (page 8-9)
Auto Sending (page 8-9)
Destination (page 8-8)
Job Log Subject (page 8-10)
Counter
Printed Pages (page 3-11)
Scanned Pages (page 3-11)
User Property (page 97)
User Name (page 9-7)
Login User Name (page 9-7)
Login Password (page 9-7)
Access Level (page 9-7)
Account Name (page 9-7)
E-mail Address (page 9-7)
Simple Login (page 9-7)
My Panel (page 9-7)
Group Name (page 9-7)
Group ID (page 9-7)
xiii
Cassette/MP Tray
Settings (page 9-8)
Common Settings
(page 9-9)
Cassette 1 (to 3) (page
9-8)
Paper Size (page 9-8)
Multi Purpose Tray
(page 9-8)
Paper Size (page 9-8)
Media Type (page 9-8)
Media Type (page 9-8)
Default Screen (page 9-9)
Sound (page 9-9)
Buzzer (page 9-9)
Volume (page 9-9)
Key Confirmation (page 9-9)
Job Finish (page 9-9)
Ready (page 9-9)
Warning (page 9-9)
Key Confirmation (USB Keyboard) (page 9-9)
FAX Speaker Volume (refer to Fax Operation Guide)
FAX Monitor Volume (refer to Fax Operation Guide)
Original Settings (page
9-9)
Paper Settings (page 910)
Custom Original Size (page 9-9)
Original Auto Detect (page 9-10)
Custom Paper Size (page 9-10)
Media Type Settings (page 9-10)
Default Paper Source (page 9-10)
Paper Selection (page 9-10)
Media for Auto (B & W) (page 9-10)
Special Paper Action (page 9-11)
xiv
Function Defaults (page
9-12)
File Format (page 9-12)
Original Orientation (page 9-12)
Collate/Offset (page 9-12)
File Separation (page 9-12)
Scan Resolution (page 9-12)
Color Selection (page 9-12)
Original Image (page 9-12)
Background Density Adj. (page 9-12)
EcoPrint (page 9-12)
Prevent Bleed-through (page 9-12)
FAX TX Resolution (refer to Fax Operation Guide)
Zoom (page 9-12)
Margin (page 9-12)
Continuous Scan (page 9-12)
Auto Image Rotation (page 9-12)
File Name Entry (page 9-13)
E-mail Subject/Body (page 9-13)
FTP Encrypted TX (page 9-13)
JPEG/TIFF Print (page 9-13)
XPS Fit to Page (page 9-13)
Detail Settings (page 913)
Paper Output (page 913)
Image Quality (page 9-13)
PDF/A (page 9-13)
Copy/Document Box (page 9-13)
Printer (page 9-13)
FAX (refer to Fax Operation Guide)
Preset Limit (page 9-13)
Error Handling (page 914)
Duplexing Error (page 9-14)
Finishing Error (page 9-14)
No Staple Error (page 9-14)
Stapling Limit Error (page 9-14)
Paper Mismatch Error (page 9-14)
Inserted Paper Mismatch (page 9-14)
Measurement (page 9-14)
Keyboard Layout (page 9-14)
USB Keyboard Type (page 9-15)
Copy (page 9-15)
Auto Paper Selection (page 9-15)
Auto % Priority (page 9-15)
Reserve Next Priority (page 9-15)
xv
Send (page 9-15)
Dest. Check before Send (page 9-15)
Entry Check for New Dest. (page 9-15)
Send and Forward
(page 9-15)
Forward (page 9-15)
Destination (page 9-15)
Color TIFF Compression (page 9-15)
Default Screen (page 9-15)
Document Box
Sub Address Box (refer to Fax Operation Guide)
Job Box (page 5-4)
Quick Copy Job Retention (page 5-6)
Deletion of Job Retention (page 5-9)
Polling Box (refer to Fax Operation Guide)
FAX (refer to Fax Operation Guide)
Address Book/One
Touch
Address Book (page 6-24)
One Touch Key (page 6-33)
Address Book Defaults
Sort
Print List (refer to Fax Operation Guide)
User Login/Job
Accounting
User Login Settings
(page 9-25)
User Login (page 9-27)
Local User List (page 9-30)
Simple login settings
(page 9-38)
Simple Login (page 9-38)
Simple Login Setup (page 9-38)
Local User Authorization (page 9-29)
Group Authorization
Set. (page 9-44)
Group Authorization (page 9-44)
Group List (page 9-44)
Obtain NW User Property (page 9-48)
Job Accounting
Settings (page 9-50)
Job Accounting (page 9-53)
Print Accounting Report (page 9-63)
Total Job Accounting
(page 9-61)
Printed Pages (page 9-61)
Scanned Pages (page 9-61)
FAX TX Pages (page 9-61)
FAX TX Time (page 9-61)
Counter Reset (page 9-61)
Each Job Accounting (page 9-61)
Accounting List (page 9-55)
Default Setting (page 964)
Apply Limit (page 9-64)
Copier/Printer Count (page 9-64)
Default Counter Limit (page 9-65)
Count by Paper Size (page 9-65)
Unknown ID Job (page 9-66)
xvi
Printer (page 9-16)
Emulation (page 9-16)
EcoPrint (page 9-16)
Override A4/Letter (page 9-16)
Duplex (page 9-16)
Copies (page 9-16)
Orientation (page 9-16)
Wide A4 (page 9-16)
Form Feed TimeOut (page 9-16)
LF Action (page 9-16)
CR Action (page 9-16)
Paper Feed Mode (page 9-16)
Resolution (page 9-17)
KIR (page 9-17)
System (page 9-17)
Network (page 9-17)
Host Name (page 9-17)
TCP/IP Settings (page
9-17)
TCP/IP Settings (page 9-17)
IPv4 (page 9-17)
IPv6 Settings (page 9-18)
Protocol Detail (page 9-18)
Netware (page 9-19)
AppleTalk (page 9-19)
WSD Scan (page 9-19)
WSD Print (page 9-19)
Enhanced WSD (page 9-20)
Enhanced WSD (SSL) (page 9-20)
IPSec (page 9-20)
Secure Protocol (page
9-20)
SSL (page 9-20)
IPP Security (page 9-20)
HTTP Security (page 9-20)
LDAP Security (([WAddress Book) (page 9-20)
LDAP Security (User3URSHUW\) (page 9-20)
LAN Interface (page 9-20)
Interface Block Setting
(page 9-21)
USB Host (page 9-21)
USB Device (page 9-21)
Optional Interface 1 (page 9-21)
Optional Interface 2 (page 9-21)
Security Level (page 9-4)
Restart (page 9-4)
xvii
RAM Disk Setting (page 9-21)
Optional Memory (page 9-21)
Optional Function (page 11-5)
Date/Timer (page 9-21)
Date/Timer (page 9-21)
Date Format (page 9-21)
Time Zone (page 9-21)
Auto Panel Reset (page 9-21)
Auto Sleep (page 9-21)
Sleep Level (page 9-22)
Auto Error Clear (page 9-22)
Low Power Timer (page 9-22)
Panel Reset Timer (page 9-22)
Sleep Timer (page 9-22)
Interrupt Clear Timer (page 9-22)
Error Clear Timer (page 9-22)
Unusable Time (refer to Fax Operation Guide)
Adjustment/
Maintenance (page 922)
Density Adjustment
(page 9-22)
Copy (page 9-22)
Background Density
Adj. (page 9-23)
Copy (Auto) (page 9-23)
Toner Save Level
(EcoPrint) (page 9-23)
Copy (page 9-23)
Send/Box (page 9-22)
Send/Box (Auto) (page 9-23)
Printer (page 9-23)
Print Density (page 9-23)
Auto Color Correction (page 9-23)
Correcting Black Line (page 9-23)
Display Brightness (page 9-23)
Gray Adjustment (page 9-24)
Drum Refresh 1 (page 9-24)
Drum Refresh 2 (page 9-24)
Auto Drum Refresh (page 9-24)
DP Adjustment (page 9-24)
xviii
1
Preface
This chapter explains the following topics:
Notice ................................................................................................................................................................. 1-2
Safety Conventions in This Guide ........................................................................................................... 1-2
Environment ............................................................................................................................................. 1-3
Precautions for Use ................................................................................................................................. 1-3
Legal and Safety Information ............................................................................................................................. 1-9
Legal Information ..................................................................................................................................... 1-9
Energy Saving Control Function ............................................................................................................ 1-12
Automatic 2-Sided Copy Function ......................................................................................................... 1-12
Paper Recycling ..................................................................................................................................... 1-12
Energy Star (ENERGY STAR®) Program .............................................................................................. 1-12
About this Operation Guide .............................................................................................................................. 1-13
Conventions in This Guide ..................................................................................................................... 1-13
Originals and Paper Sizes ..................................................................................................................... 1-15
1-1
Preface > Notice
Notice
Safety Conventions in This Guide
The sections of this guide and parts of the machine marked with symbols are safety warnings meant to protect the user,
other individuals and surrounding objects, and ensure correct and safe usage of the machine. The symbols and their
meanings are indicated below.
WARNING: Indicates that serious injury or even death may result from insufficient
attention to or incorrect compliance with the related points.
CAUTION: Indicates that personal injury or mechanical damage may result from
insufficient attention to or incorrect compliance with the related points.
Symbols
The  symbol indicates that the related section includes safety warnings. Specific points of attention are indicated
inside the symbol.
... [General warning]
... [Warning of high temperature]
The
symbol indicates that the related section includes information on prohibited actions. Specifics of the prohibited
action are indicated inside the symbol.
... [Warning of prohibited action]
... [Disassembly prohibited]
The  symbol indicates that the related section includes information on actions which must be performed. Specifics of
the required action are indicated inside the symbol.
... [Alert of required action]
... [Remove the power plug from the outlet]
... [Always connect the machine to an outlet with a ground connection]
Please contact your service representative to order a replacement if the safety warnings in this Operation Guide are
illegible or if the guide itself is missing (fee required).
NOTE
An original which resembles a bank note closely may not be copied properly in some rare cases because this
machine is equipped with a counterfeiting prevention function.
1-2
Preface > Notice
Environment
The service environmental conditions are as follows:
•
Temperature: 50 to 90.5 °F (10 to 32.5 °C)
•
Humidity: 15 to 80 %
However, adverse environmental conditions may affect the image quality. It is recommended to use the machine at a
temperature: around 60.8 to 80.6 °F or less (16 to 27 °C), humidity: around 36 to 65%. In addition, Avoid the following
locations when selecting a site for the machine.
•
Avoid locations near a window or with exposure to direct sunlight.
•
Avoid locations with vibrations.
•
Avoid locations with drastic temperature fluctuations.
•
Avoid locations with direct exposure to hot or cold air.
•
Avoid poorly ventilated locations.
If the floor is delicate against casters, when this machine is moved after installation, the floor material may be damaged.
During copying, some ozone is released, but the amount does not cause any ill effect to one’s health. If, however, the
machine is used over a long period of time in a poorly ventilated room or when making an extremely large number of
copies, the smell may become unpleasant. To maintain the appropriate environment for copy work, it is suggested that
the room be properly ventilated.
Precautions for Use
Cautions when handling consumables
CAUTION
Do not attempt to incinerate the toner container or the waste toner box. Dangerous sparks may cause burns.
Keep the toner container and the waste toner box out of the reach of children.
If toner happens to spill from the toner container or the waste toner box, avoid inhalation and ingestion, as well as
contact with your eyes and skin.
•
If you do happen to inhale toner, move to a place with fresh air and gargle thoroughly with a large amount of water. If
coughing develops, contact a physician.
•
If you do happen to ingest toner, rinse your mouth with water and drink 1 or 2 cups of water to dilute the contents of
your stomach. If necessary, contact a physician.
•
If you do happen to get toner in your eyes, flush them thoroughly with water. If there is any remaining tenderness,
contact a physician.
•
If toner does happen to get on your skin, wash with soap and water.
Do not attempt to force open or destroy the toner container or the waste toner box.
Other precautions
Return the exhausted toner container and waste toner box to your dealer or service representative. The collected toner
container and waste toner box will be recycled or disposed in accordance with the relevant regulations.
Store the machine while avoiding exposure to direct sunlight.
Store the machine in a place where the temperature stays below 40 °C while avoiding sharp changes of temperature
and humidity.
If the machine will not be used for an extended period of time, remove the paper from the cassette and the Multi Purpose
(MP) Tray, return it to its original package and reseal it.
1-3
Preface > Notice
Laser Safety (Europe)
Laser radiation could be hazardous to the human body. For this reason, laser radiation emitted inside this machine is
hermetically sealed within the protective housing and external cover. In the normal operation of the product by user, no
radiation can leak from the machine.
This machine is classified as Class 1 laser product under IEC/EN 60825-1:2007.
Caution: Performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation
exposure.
These labels are attached to the laser scanner unit inside the machine and are not in a user access area.
The label shown below is attached on the rear side of the machine.
1-4
Preface > Notice
SAFETY OF LASER BEAM (USA)
1. Safety of laser beam
This machine has been certified by the manufacturer to Class 1 level under the radiation performance standards
established by the U.S.DHHS (Department of Health and Human Services) in 1968. This indicates that the product is
safe to use during normal operation and maintenance. The laser optical system, enclosed in a protective housing and
sealed within the external covers, never permits the laser beam to escape.
2. The CDRH Act
A laser-product-related act was implemented on Aug. 2, 1976, by the Center for Devices and Radiological Health
(CDRH) of the U.S. Food and Drug Administration (FDA). This act prohibits the sale of laser products in the U.S. without
certification, and applies to laser products manufactured after Aug. 1, 1976. The label shown below indicates
compliance with the CDRH regulations and must be attached to laser products marketed in the United States. On this
machine, the label is on the right.
255
255b
305
3. Optical unit
When checking the optical unit, avoid direct exposure to the laser beam, which is invisible. Shown at below is the label
located on the cover of the optical unit.
4. Maintenance
For safety of the service personnel, follow the maintenance instructions in the other section of this manual.
5. Safety switch
The power to the laser unit is cut off when the front cover is opened.
1-5
Preface > Notice
Safety Instructions Regarding the Disconnection of Power
Caution: The power plug is the main isolation device! Other switches on the equipment are only functional switches and
are not suitable for isolating the equipment from the power source.
Attention: Le débranchement de la fiche secteur est le seul moyen de mettre l’appareil hors tension. Les interrupteurs
sur l’appareil ne sont que des interrupteurs de fonctionnement: ils ne mettent pas l’appareil hors tension.
WARNING
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of
the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential
installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no
guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to
radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try
to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
•
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
•
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
•
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
•
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
•
The use of a non-shielded interface cable with the referenced device is prohibited.
CAUTION — The changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
This device contains the module (FCC ID: E522K3A0512, IC: 1059B-2K3A0512), which complies with Part 15 of FCC
Rules and RSS-Gen of IC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions; (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
Radio Tag Technology
In some countries the radio tag technology used in this equipment to identify the toner container may be subject to
authorization and the use of this equipment may consequently be restricted.
MERCURY WARNING (the United States)
THE LAMP(S) INSIDE THIS PRODUCT CONTAIN MERCURY AND MUST BE RECYCLED OR DISPOSED
OF ACCORDING TO LOCAL, STATE OR FEDERAL LAWS.
Other precautions (for users in California, the United States)
This product contains a CR Coin Lithium Battery which contains Perchlorate Material - special handling may apply. See
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
1-6
Preface > Notice
Warranty (the United States)
255/255b/305
MULTIFUNCTIONAL PRODUCT LIMITED WARRANTY
Kyocera Mita America, Inc. and Kyocera Mita Canada, Ltd. (both referred to as “Kyocera”) warrant
the Customer’s new Multifunctional Product (referred to as “MFP”), and the new accessories installed with the initial installation of the MFP, against any defects in material and workmanship for
a period of one (1) year, or 300,000 copies/prints from date of installation, whichever first occurs. In
the event the MFP or an accessory is found to be defective within the warranty period, Kyocera’s
only obligation and the Customer’s exclusive remedy shall be replacement of any defective parts.
Kyocera shall have no obligation to furnish labor.
This warranty covers Maintenance Kits and the components of Maintenance Kits included with the
original MFP for a period of one year or 300,000 copies/prints, whichever first occurs. Maintenance
Kits consist of the developing unit, the drum unit, the transfer belt, and the fixing unit. Replacement
Maintenance Kits have a 90 day Limited Warranty.
This warranty is valid only for the original retail purchaser (referred to as the “Customer”) of a new
Kyocera MFP in the United States of America or Canada, based upon the country of purchase.
In order to obtain performance of this warranty, the Customer must immediately notify the
Authorized Kyocera Dealer from whom the product was purchased. If the Kyocera Dealer is not
able to provide service, write to Kyocera at the address below for the name and address of the
Authorized Kyocera Dealer in your area, or check Kyocera’s website at http://
www.kyoceramita.com.
This warranty does not cover MFPs or accessories which: (a) have become damaged due to
operator negligence, misuse, accidents, improper storage or unusual physical or electrical stress,
(b) have used parts or supplies which are not genuine Kyocera brand parts or supplies, (c) have
been installed or serviced by a technician not employed by Kyocera or an Authorized Kyocera
Dealer, or (d) have had the serial number modified, altered, or removed.
This warranty gives the Customer specific legal rights. The Customer may also have other rights,
which vary from state to state, or province to province. Neither the seller, nor any other person, is
authorized to extend the time period or expand this warranty on behalf of Kyocera.
THIS WARRANTY IS MADE IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, AND KYOCERA SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED
WARRANTY OR CONDITION OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE. THIS WARRANTY SHALL NOT EXTEND TO, AND KYOCERA SHALL NOT BE
LIABLE FOR, ANY INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WHICH MAY ARISE OUT OF
THE USE OF, OR INABILITY TO USE, THE MFP.
1-7
Preface > Notice
Legal Restriction on Copying/Scanning
It may be prohibited to copy/scan copyrighted material without permission of the copyright owner.
Copying/Scanning the following items is prohibited and may be penalized by low. It may not be limited to these items. Do
not knowingly copy/scan the items that are not to be copied/scanned.
•
Paper money
•
Bank note
•
Securities
•
Stamp
•
Passport
•
Certificate
Local laws and regulations may prohibit or restrict copying/scanning of other items not mentioned above.
1-8
Preface > Legal and Safety Information
Legal and Safety Information
Legal Information
Copying or other reproduction of all or part of this guide without the prior written consent of Kyocera Mita Corporation is
prohibited.
Regarding Trade Names
•
PRESCRIBE and ECOSYS are trademarks of Kyocera Corporation.
•
KPDL is a trademark of Kyocera Corporation.
•
Microsoft, MS-DOS and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and/or other
countries.
•
PCL is a trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company.
•
Adobe Acrobat, Adobe Reader and PostScript are trademarks of Adobe Systems, Incorporated.
•
Ethernet is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation.
•
Novell and NetWare are registered trademarks of Novell, Inc.
•
IBM and IBM PC/AT are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation.
•
Power PC is a trademark of IBM in the U.S.A. and/or other countries.
•
AppleTalk is a registered trademark of Apple Computer, Inc.
•
TrueType is a registered trademark of Apple Computer, Inc.
•
All European language fonts installed in this machine are used under licensing agreement with Monotype Imaging
Inc.
•
Helvetica, Palatino and Times are registered trademarks of Linotype GmbH.
•
ITC Avant Garde Gothic, ITC Bookman, ITC ZapfChancery and ITC ZapfDingbats are registered trademarks of
International Typeface Corporation.
•
UFST™ MicroType® fonts by Monotype Imaging Inc. are installed in this machine.
•
This machine contains the NF module developed by ACCESS Co., Ltd.
•
This machine contains the software having modules developed by Independent JPEG Group.
•
ThinPrint is a trademark of ThinPrint GmbH in Germany and other countries.
All other brands and product names are registered trademarks or trademarks designations ™ and ® will not be used in
this Operation Guide.
GPL/LGPL
This product contains GPL (http://www.gnu.org/licenses/gpl.html) and/or LGPL (http://www.gnu.org/licenses/lgpl.html)
software as part of its firmware. You can get the source code, and you are permitted to copy, redistribute and modify it
under the terms of GPL/LGPL. For further information including availability of the source code, visit
http://www.kyoceramita.com/gpl/.
Open SSL License
Copyright (c) 1998-2006 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following
conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.
1-9
Preface > Legal and Safety Information
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment:
“This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit.
(http://www.openssl.org/)”
4. The names “OpenSSL Toolkit” and “OpenSSL Project” must not be used to endorse or promote products derived
from this software without prior written permission.
For written permission, please contact openssl-core@openssl.org.
5. Products derived from this software may not be called “OpenSSL” nor may “OpenSSL” appear in their names without
prior written permission of the OpenSSL Project.
6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment: “This product includes software
developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)”
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR
ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON
ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE
OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
Original SSLeay License
Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com) All rights reserved.
This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com). The implementation was written so
as to conform with Netscapes SSL.
This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as the following conditions are aheared to. The
following conditions apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA, lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the
SSL code. The SSL documentation included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the
holder is Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).
Copyright remains Eric Young's, and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be removed.
If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library used.
This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in documentation (online or textual) provided with the
package.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following
conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement:
“This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com)”
The word ‘cryptographic’ can be left out if the rouines from the library being used are not cryptographic related :-).
4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from the apps directory (application code) you
must include an acknowledgement: “This product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com)”
1-10
Preface > Legal and Safety Information
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN
ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or derivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e.
this code cannot simply be copied and put under another distribution licence [including the GNU Public Licence.]
Monotype Imaging License Agreement
1 Software shall mean the digitally encoded, machine readable, scalable outline data as encoded in a special format as
well as the UFST Software.
2 You agree to accept a non-exclusive license to use the Software to reproduce and display weights, styles and
versions of letters, numerals, characters and symbols (Typefaces) solely for your own customary business or
personal purposes at the address stated on the registration card you return to Monotype Imaging. Under the terms of
this License Agreement, you have the right to use the Fonts on up to three printers. If you need to have access to the
fonts on more than three printers, you need to acquire a multiuser license agreement which can be obtained from
Monotype Imaging. Monotype Imaging retains all rights, title and interest to the Software and Typefaces and no rights
are granted to you other than a License to use the Software on the terms expressly set forth in this Agreement.
3 To protect proprietary rights of Monotype Imaging, you agree to maintain the Software and other proprietary
information concerning the Typefaces in strict confidence and to establish reasonable procedures regulating access
to and use of the Software and Typefaces.
4 You agree not to duplicate or copy the Software or Typefaces, except that you may make one backup copy. You
agree that any such copy shall contain the same proprietary notices as those appearing on the original.
5 This License shall continue until the last use of the Software and Typefaces, unless sooner terminated. This License
may be terminated by Monotype Imaging if you fail to comply with the terms of this License and such failure is not
remedied within thirty (30) days after notice from Monotype Imaging. When this License expires or is terminated, you
shall either return to Monotype Imaging or destroy all copies of the Software and Typefaces and documentation as
requested.
6 You agree that you will not modify, alter, disassemble, decrypt, reverse engineer or decompile the Software.
7 Monotype Imaging warrants that for ninety (90) days after delivery, the Software will perform in accordance with
Monotype Imaging-published specifications, and the diskette will be free from defects in material and workmanship.
Monotype Imaging does not warrant that the Software is free from all bugs, errors and omissions.
The parties agree that all other warranties, expressed or implied, including warranties of fitness for a particular
purpose and merchantability, are excluded.
8 Your exclusive remedy and the sole liability of Monotype Imaging in connection with the Software and Typefaces is
repair or replacement of defective parts, upon their return to Monotype Imaging.
In no event will Monotype Imaging be liable for lost profits, lost data, or any other incidental or consequential
damages, or any damages caused by abuse or misapplication of the Software and Typefaces.
9 Massachusetts U.S.A. law governs this Agreement.
10 You shall not sublicense, sell, lease, or otherwise transfer the Software and/or Typefaces without the prior written
consent of Monotype Imaging.
11 Use, duplication or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in the Rights in Technical Data
and Computer Software clause at FAR 252-227-7013, subdivision (b)(3)(ii) or subparagraph (c)(1)(ii), as appropriate.
Further use, duplication or disclosure is subject to restrictions applicable to restricted rights software as set forth in
FAR 52.227-19 (c)(2).
12 You acknowledge that you have read this Agreement, understand it, and agree to be bound by its terms and
conditions. Neither party shall be bound by any statement or representation not contained in this Agreement. No
change in this Agreement is effective unless written and signed by properly authorized representatives of each party.
By opening this diskette package, you agree to accept the terms and conditions of this Agreement.
1-11
Preface > Legal and Safety Information
Energy Saving Control Function
The device comes equipped with a Low Power Mode where energy consumption is reduced after a certain amount of
time elapses since the device was last used, as well as a Sleep where printer and fax functions remain in a waiting state
but power consumption is still reduced to a minimum when there is no activity with the device within a set amount of
time.
Sleep
The device automatically enters Sleep when 1 minute have passed since the device was last used. The amount of time
of no activity that must pass before Sleep is activated may be lengthened. For more information refer to Sleep and Auto
Sleep on page 2-21.
Low Power Mode
The device automatically enters Low Power Mode when 1 minute have passed since the device was last used. The
amount of time of no activity that must pass before Low Power Mode is activated may be lengthened. For more
information refer to Low Power Mode and Auto Low Power Mode on page 2-20.
By default, Sleep overrides Low Power Mode.
Automatic 2-Sided Copy Function
This device includes 2-sided copying as a standard function. For example, by copying two 1-sided originals onto a single
sheet of paper as a 2-sided copy, it is possible to lower the amount of paper used. For more information refer to Duplex
on page 4-8.
Paper Recycling
This device supports the recycled paper which reduces the load on the environment. Your sales or service
representative can provide information about recommended paper types.
Energy Star (ENERGY STAR®) Program
We have determined as a company participating in ENERGY STAR that this product has earned the
ENERGY STAR.
1-12
Preface > About this Operation Guide
About this Operation Guide
This Operation Guide contains the following chapters.
Chapter
Contents
1
Preface
Includes information about operating precautions, trademarks, and this manual.
2
Preparation before Use
Provides information about part names, connecting cables, and setting up and
configuring the machine.
3
Common Operations
Explains overall machine operation, including loading paper and originals and logging in
and out.
4
Copying
Describes the functions you can use when copying.
5
Printing
Provides information about functionality that is available when using the machine as a
printer.
6
Sending
Describes the functions you can use when sending originals.
7
Document Box
Provides a basic guide to using document boxes.
8
Status / Job Cancel
Explains how to check the job status and job history and how to cancel jobs being
printed or waiting to print. Also explains how to check the remaining paper and device
status and how to cancel fax transmission.
9
Setup, Registration, and User
Management
Explains system menu functionality related to overall machine operation, job
accounting, and user management.
10
Troubleshooting
Explains how to respond to error indications such as when the machine runs out of
toner and problems such as paper jams.
11
Appendix
Explains how to enter characters, and lists the machine specifications.
Introduces the convenient optional equipment available for this machine.
Provides information on media types and paper sizes. Also includes a glossary of terms.
Conventions in This Guide
The following conventions are used depending on the nature of the description.
Convention
Description
Example
Bold
Indicates the operation panel keys or a computer screen.
Press the Start key.
[Regular]
Indicates the touch panel keys.
Press [OK].
Italic
Indicates a message displayed on the touch panel.
Ready to copy is
displayed.
Used to emphasize a key word, phrase or references to additional
information.
For more information
refer to Sleep and Auto
Sleep on page 2-21.
NOTE
Indicates supplemental information or operations for reference.
IMPORTANT
Indicates items that are required or prohibited so as to avoid problems.
Caution
Indicates what must be observed to prevent injury or machine breakdown
and how to deal with it.
1-13
NOTE
IMPORTANT
Caution
Preface > About this Operation Guide
Job types for which each function can be set are shown with icons.
Icon
Icon
This function can be set while copying a
document.
Description
This function can be set while printing from USB
memory.
GB0097_00
Print from
USB
GB0001_01
Copy
Description
Copy Screen
This function can be set while sending a
document.
This function can be set while saving a file to USB
memory.
GB0096_00
Scan to
USB
GB0055_00
Send
Print Screen
Send Screen
Store File Screen
In this guide, steps where touch panel keys are used are outlined in red.
GB0001_01
E.g.) Select [Zoom].
Procedures consisting of a series of operation panel and/or touch panel operations are numbered as follows:
E.g.) Select [Functions] and then [EcoPrint].
GB0002_01
1
GB0001_01
2
Use [
1-14
] or [
] to scroll up and down.
Preface > About this Operation Guide
Originals and Paper Sizes
This section explains the notation used in this guide when referring to sizes of originals or paper sizes.
As with A4, B5 and Letter, which may be used either in the horizontal or vertical direction, horizontal direction is
indicated by an additional letter R in order to indicate the orientation of the original/paper.
Placement direction
Indicated size*
Vertical
direction
A4, B5, A5, Letter,
Statement
Original
Paper
For the originals/paper, dimension A is longer than B.
Horizontal
direction
A4-R, B5-R, A5-R,
Letter-R, Statement-R
Original
Paper
For the originals/paper, dimension A is shorter than B.
*
The size of the original/paper that can be used depends on the function and source tray. For further
details, refer to the page detailing that function or source tray.
Icons on the Touch Panel
The following icons are used to indicate originals and paper placement directions on the touch panel.
Placement
direction
Originals
Vertical
direction
Horizontal
direction
1-15
Paper
Preface > About this Operation Guide
1-16
2
Preparation before
Use
This chapter explains the following topics:
Part Names ........................................................................................................................................................ 2-2
Machine ................................................................................................................................................... 2-2
Operation Panel ....................................................................................................................................... 2-6
Touch Panel ............................................................................................................................................. 2-7
Determining the Connection Method and Preparing Cables .............................................................................. 2-8
Connection Example ................................................................................................................................ 2-8
Preparing Necessary Cables ................................................................................................................... 2-9
Connecting Cables ........................................................................................................................................... 2-10
Connecting LAN Cable .......................................................................................................................... 2-10
Connecting USB Cable ........................................................................................................................... 2-11
Connecting the Power Cable .................................................................................................................. 2-11
Power On/Off ................................................................................................................................................... 2-12
Power On ............................................................................................................................................... 2-12
Power Off ............................................................................................................................................... 2-12
Installing Software ............................................................................................................................................ 2-14
Installing Printer Driver ........................................................................................................................... 2-14
Setting TWAIN Driver ............................................................................................................................. 2-18
Setting WIA Driver (Windows 7, Windows Vista and Windows Server 2008) ........................................ 2-19
Energy Saver function ...................................................................................................................................... 2-20
Low Power Mode and Auto Low Power Mode ....................................................................................... 2-20
Sleep and Auto Sleep ............................................................................................................................ 2-21
Machine Setup Wizard ..................................................................................................................................... 2-22
COMMAND CENTER (Settings for E-mail) ...................................................................................................... 2-23
Sending E-mail ...................................................................................................................................... 2-24
Pat
er
s
s
t
r
aat106108
2300T
ur
nhout
T
el
:
014/
42.
55.
99
i
nf
o@v
anmec
hel
en.
be
www.
v
anmec
hel
en.
be
F
ax
:
014/
42.
32.
64
2-1
Preparation before Use > Part Names
Part Names
Machine
1
3
4
5
2
6
9
7
10
8
11
1 Document Processor/Original Cover
2 Platen
3 Original Size Indicator Plates
4 Slit Glass
5 Operation Panel
6 Inner Tray
7 Front Cover
8 Cassette 1
9 USB Memory Slot (A1)
10 Right Cover 1
11 Handles
12 Job Separator Tray
2-2
12
Preparation before Use > Part Names
13
14
15
16
17
18 19
13 Original Width Guides
14 Original Table
15 Cleaning Cloth Compartment
16 Original Loaded Indicator
17 Toner Container Stopper
18 Toner Container
19 Waste Toner Box
23
20
22
21
20 Paper Width Guide
21 Paper Length Guide
22 Multi Purpose Tray
23 Paper Width Guide
2-3
Preparation before Use > Part Names
24
26
29
25
27
31
28
32
24 Option Interface Slot 2
25 Network Interface Connector
26 USB Interface Connector (A2)
27 USB Port (B1)
28 Option Interface Slot 1
29 Scanner Lock
30 Main Power Switch
31 Handles
32 Cassette Heater Switch
2-4
30
Preparation before Use > Part Names
34
35
33
38
36
37
33 Top Cover
34 Tray Extension
35 Document Finisher Tray
36 Staple Cover
37 Staple Cartridge Holder
38 Bridge Unit Cover
2-5
Preparation before Use > Part Names
Operation Panel
Displays the System Menu/Counter
screen.
Displays the Status/Job
Cancel screen.
Displays the Copy
screen.
Displays the Favorites
screen.
Displays the screen for
sending.
Displays the Document
Box screen.
Displays the FAX screen.
Displays the Interrupt Copy
screen.
Ends operation (logs out)
on the Administration
screen.
Puts the machine into Low
Power Mode.
Puts the machine into Sleep
Mode. Recovers from Sleep
if in Sleep Mode.
Lit when the machine's
main power is on.
Lights when there is paper in
the job separator tray.
Touch panel. Displays buttons
for configuring machine
settings.
Processing: Blinks while printing or sending.
Memory: Blinks while the machine is accessing the
fax memory or USB memory (generalpurpose item).
Attention: Lights or blinks when an error occurs and
a job is stopped.
Numeric keys.
Enter numbers and
symbols.
Clears entered numbers and
characters.
Returns settings to their
default states.
Specifies registered
information such as address
numbers and user IDs by
number.
Cancels or pauses the
printing job in progress.
Finalizes numeric key entry,
and finalizes screen during
setting of functions. Operates
linked with the on-screen
[OK].
Starts copying and
scanning operations and
processing for setting
operations.
2-6
Preparation before Use > Part Names
Touch Panel
Displays the status of the
equipment as well as necessary
operation messages.
Displays the time and number of
copies.
GB0001_04
Displays available functions.
Displays Favorites.
Configures more advanced function
settings.
Displays shortcuts.
Displays the status of the
equipment as well as necessary
operation messages.
GB0002_00
Displays available functions and
settings.
Return to the previous screen.
Scrolls up and down when the list of
values cannot be displayed in its
entirety on a single screen.
Registers functions as shortcuts.
2-7
Preparation before Use > Determining the Connection Method and Preparing Cables
Determining the Connection Method and
Preparing Cables
Check the method to connect the equipment to a PC or network, and prepare the necessary cables for your
environment.
Connection Example
Determine the method to connect the equipment to a PC or network by referring to the illustration below.
Connecting a scanner to your PC network with a network cable (1000BASE-T, 100BASE-TX or 10BASE-T)
COMMAND CENTER
Network
Network settings, Scanner
default settings, User and
destination registration
Send E-mail
Sends the image data of scanned
originals to the desired recipient as
a file attached to an E-mail
message.
 6-18
Administrator’s PC
MFP
Printing
USB
Network
Send SMB
Saves the scanned image as a data
file on your PC.
 6-19
Network
Network FAX
(Option)
Network
Network
Send FTP
Sends the scanned image as a
data file on the FTP.
 6-19
FAX (Option)
Network
TWAIN Scanning
Network
WIA Scanning
FAX
TWAIN and WIA are standardized
interface for communication
between software applications and
image acquisition devices.
2-8
Preparation before Use > Determining the Connection Method and Preparing Cables
Preparing Necessary Cables
Prepare the necessary cables according to the interface you use.
Connection Environment
Function
Necessary Cable
Connect a LAN cable to the machine.
Printer/Scanner/Scanner (TWAIN/WIA)
LAN (10Base-T, 100Base-TX, or
1000BASE-T Shielded)
Connect a USB cable to the machine.
Printer
USB2.0 compatible cable (Hi-Speed USB
compliant, Max. 5.0 m, Shielded)
2-9
Preparation before Use > Connecting Cables
Connecting Cables
Connecting LAN Cable
The equipment can be connected with a network cable and used as a network printer or network scanner.
1
Power Off.
Check that the indicators are off.
2
Connect the machine.
1 Connect the LAN cable to the network interface located on left side of the body.
2 Connect the other end of the cable to the hub.
3
Set up the machine.
Configure the network settings.
For details, refer to Machine Setup Wizard on page 2-22.
2-10
Preparation before Use > Connecting Cables
Connecting USB Cable
The equipment can be connected with a USB cable and used as a printer or scanner in an environment where there is
no network.
1
Power Off.
Check that the indicators are off.
2
Connect the machine.
1 Connect the USB cable to the appropriate interface located on the left side of the body.
2 Connect the other end of the cable to the PC.
Connecting the Power Cable
Connect one end of the supplied power cable to the machine and the other end to a power
outlet.
IMPORTANT
Only use the power cable that comes with the machine.
2-11
Preparation before Use > Power On/Off
Power On/Off
Power On
When the main power indicator is lit...(Recovery from sleep)
Main Power indicator
Press the Power key.
When the main power indicator is off...
Turn the main power switch on.
IMPORTANT
When turning off the main power switch, do not turn on the main power switch again
immediately. Wait more than 5 seconds, and then turn on the main power switch.
Power Off
When not turning off the main power switch (sleep)
Main Power indicator
Press the Power key. The Power key light will go out, and the Main Power indicator will light
up.
2-12
Preparation before Use > Power On/Off
When turning off the main power switch
Note that when the main power switch is turned off, the machine will be unable to
automatically receive print data from computers or faxes.
1
Press the Power key.
Main Power indicator
Check that the indicators are off.
Verify that the Power key light has gone out and that the Main Power indicator is lit up.
2
Turn the main power switch off.
NOTE
When the Processing indicator or Memory indicator is lit up, the machine is operating.
Turning off the main power switch while the machine is operating may cause it to
malfunction.
In case of not using the machine for an extended period of time
CAUTION
If this machine will be left unused for an extended period (e.g. overnight), turn it off
at the main power switch. If the machine will not be used for an even longer period
of time (e.g. vacation), remove the power plug from the outlet as a safety
precaution. If the optional Fax kit is installed, note that turning the machine off at
the main power switch disables fax transmission and reception.
IMPORTANT
Remove paper from the cassettes and seal it in the paper storage bag to protect it
from humidity.
2-13
Preparation before Use > Installing Software
Installing Software
Install appropriate software on your PC from the included Product Library CD-ROM (Product Library) if you want to use
the printer function of this machine or perform TWAIN / WIA transmission or Network FAX transmission from your PC.
NOTE
Installation on Windows must be done by a user logged on with administrator privileges.
Plug and Play is disabled on this device when in Sleep. Wake the device from Low Power Mode or Sleep before
continuing. Refer to Low Power Mode and Auto Low Power Mode on page 2-20 and Sleep and Auto Sleep on page 221.
The optional Fax Kit is required in order to make use of fax functionality.
Installing Printer Driver
Ensure the machine is plugged in and connected to the PC before installing the printer driver from the CD-ROM.
Installing Printer Driver in Windows
If you are connecting this machine to a Windows PC, follow the next steps to install the printer driver. The example
shows you how to connect your machine to a Windows 7 PC.
NOTE
If the Welcome to the Found New Hardware Wizard dialog box displays, select Cancel.
If the autorun screen is displayed, click Run Setup.exe.
If the user account management window appears, click Allow.
You can use either Express Mode or Custom Mode to install the software. Express Mode automatically detects
connected machines and installs the required software. Use Custom Mode if you want to specify the printer port and
select the software to be installed. For details, refer to Custom Installation in the Printer Driver Operation Guide on the
CD-ROM.
1
Insert the CD-ROM.
2
Display the screen.
3
1
2
Click View License Agreement and read the License Agreement.
2-14
Preparation before Use > Installing Software
3
Install using Express Mode.
1 Select the print system to be installed.
1
2
3
2 Customize the print system name if the print system is connected via a network.
1
2
3 Start installing.
NOTE
The machine cannot be detected unless it is on. If the computer fails to detect the machine,
verify that it is connected to the computer via a network or USB cable and that it is turned on
and click Reload.
If the Windows security window appears, click Install this driver software anyway.
4
Finish the installation.
This completes the printer driver installation procedure. Follow the on-screen instructions to
restart the system, if required.
The TWAIN driver and WIA driver can be installed if the machine and computer are connected
via a network. You can install the WIA driver using Custom Mode.
2-15
Preparation before Use > Installing Software
If you are installing the TWAIN driver or WIA driver, continue by configuring the TWAIN driver
(2-18) or WIA driver (2-19).
Installing Printer Driver in Macintosh
The machine's printer functionality can be used by a Macintosh computer.
NOTE
When printing from a Macintosh computer, set the machine’s emulation to “KPDL” or “KPDL(Auto).” For details about
the configuration method, refer to Printer on page 9-16.
If connecting by Bonjour, enable Bonjour in the machine's network settings. For details, refer to Network on page 9-17.
In the Authenticate screen, enter the name and password used to log in to the operating system.
1
Insert the CD-ROM.
Double-click the CD-ROM icon.
2
Display the screen.
1
2
Double-click
Double-click
Double-click either OS X 10.2 and 10.3 Only, OS X 10.4 Only or OS X 10.5 or higher
depending on your Mac OS version.
3
Install Printer Driver.
Install the printer driver as directed by the instructions in the installation software.
This completes the printer driver installation.
Next, specify the print settings. If an IP or AppleTalk connection is used, the settings below are
required. If a USB connection is used, the machine is automatically recognized and
connected.
2-16
Preparation before Use > Installing Software
4
Configure the printer.
1 Display the window.
2
1
2 Click the IP icon for an IP connection or the AppleTalk icon for an AppleTalk connection
and then enter the IP address and printer name.
1
2
3
4
3 Select the options available for the machine and click Continue.
1
2
4 The selected machine is added.
2-17
Preparation before Use > Installing Software
Setting TWAIN Driver
Register this machine to the TWAIN Driver.
1
Display the screen.
1 Select Start button of the Windows display, All Programs, Kyocera and then TWAIN
Driver Setting.
2 Click Add.
2
Configure TWAIN Driver.
1
2
3
Enter the machine name.
Select this machine from the list.
Enter the machine's IP address or host name.
When using SSL, select the checkbox beside SSL.
When user login administration is enabled, select
the checkbox beside Authentication, and enter
Login User Name (up to 64 characters) and
Password (up to 64 characters).
4
When job accounting is enabled, select the
checkbox beside Account ID, and enter the
account ID as many as eight digits.
5
6
NOTE
When the machine’s IP address is unknown, contact Administrator.
3
Finish registering.
NOTE
Click Delete to delete the added machine. Click Edit to change names.
2-18
Preparation before Use > Installing Software
Setting WIA Driver (Windows 7, Windows Vista and Windows
Server 2008)
Register this machine to the WIA Driver.
NOTE
The following is not necessary to register when using the machine possesses an IP address or host name that you
have specified during installation of WIA Driver.
1
Display the screen.
1 Click the Windows Start button and enter Scanner in Program and File Search. Click
Show scanners and cameras in the search list.
2 Select the same name as this machine from WIA Drivers, and press the Properties.
1
2
2
Configure WIA Driver.
Enter the machine name.
1
2
3
When using SSL, select the
checkbox beside SSL.
4
5
When user login administration is enabled, select the checkbox beside
Authentication, and enter Login User Name (up to 64 characters) and
Password (up to 64 characters).
When job accounting is enabled, select the checkbox beside Account
ID, and enter the account ID as many as eight digits.
2-19
Preparation before Use > Energy Saver function
Energy Saver function
Low Power Mode and Auto Low Power Mode
Low Power Mode
To activate Low Power Mode, press the Energy Saver key. Touch panel and all indicators on
the operation panel will go out to save power except the Energy Saver, Power, and Main
Power indicators. This status is referred to as Low Power Mode.
If print data is received during Low Power Mode, the machine automatically wakes up and
starts printing. Also when fax data arrives while the machine is in Low Power Mode when
using the optional fax, the machine automatically wakes up and starts printing.
To resume, perform one of the following actions. The machine will be ready to operate within
10 seconds.
•
Press any key on the operation panel.
•
Open the original cover or the document processor.
•
Place originals in the document processor.
Note that ambient environmental conditions, such as ventilation, may cause the machine to
respond more slowly.
Auto Low Power Mode
Auto Low Power Mode automatically switches the machine into Low Power Mode if left idle for
a preset time. The default preset time is 1 minute.
For more information about configuring settings, refer to Low Power Timer on page 9-22.
2-20
Preparation before Use > Energy Saver function
Sleep and Auto Sleep
To enter Sleep, press the Power key. Touch panel and all indicators on the operation panel will
go out to save a maximum amount of power except the Main Power indicator. This status is
referred to as Sleep.
If print data is received during Sleep, the touch panel lights up and printing starts.
When using the optional fax, received data is printed out while the operation panel remains
unlit.
To resume, press the Power key. The machine will be ready to use within 20 seconds.
Note that ambient environmental conditions, such as ventilation, may cause the machine to
respond more slowly.
Auto Sleep
Auto Sleep automatically switches the machine into Sleep if left idle for a preset time in the
Low Power Mode. The default preset time is 1 minute.
For more information about configuring settings, refer to Sleep Timer on page 9-22.
Energy Saver
This mode reduces power consumption even more than normal Sleep mode, and allows Sleep
Mode to be set separately for each function. Printing from a computer connected with a USB
cable is not available while the machine is asleep.
To use the machine, press the Power key. The time required for the machine to wake up from
power save mode and resume normal operation will be longer than for normal Sleep Mode.
NOTE
If the optional Gigabit Ethernet Board is installed, Energy Saver cannot be specified.
For more information on Energy Saver Mode settings, refer to Sleep Level on page 9-22.
2-21
Preparation before Use > Machine Setup Wizard
Machine Setup Wizard
The Machine Setup Wizard is launched when the equipment is turned on for the first time after being installed.
10:10
System Menu/Counter.
1. Date/Time
2. Network
This wizard will help you set up
your machine.
㻨㻌㻮㼍㼏㼗
㻺㼑㼤㼠㻌㻪
GB0889_00
To continue, press [Next >].
Following the instructions on the screen to configure the following settings:
Date/Timer settings
Time Zone
Summer Time
Date
Time
Network settings
Obtain IP Address
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Default Gateway
For details about settings, refer to the help information displayed on the touch panel.To make
changes after this initial configuration, refer to Date/Timer on page 9-21 and System on page 9-17.
2-22
Preparation before Use > COMMAND CENTER (Settings for E-mail)
COMMAND CENTER (Settings for E-mail)
COMMAND CENTER is a tool used for tasks such as verifying the operating status of the machine and changing the
settings for security, network printing, E-mail transmission and advanced networking.
NOTE
Here, information on the FAX settings has been omitted. For more information on using the
FAX, refer to the FAX Operation Guide.
The optional Fax Kit is required in order to make use of fax functionality.
1
Display the screen.
1 Launch your Web browser.
2 In the Address or Location bar, enter the machine’s IP address.
E.g.) http://192.168.48.21/
The web page displays basic information about the machine and COMMAND CENTER as
well as their current status.
2
Configure the function.
Select a category from the navigation bar on the left of the screen. The values for each
category must be set separately.
If restrictions have been set for COMMAND CENTER, enter a password to access pages
other than the startup page. The default password is “admin00.” The password can be
changed.
For details, refer to the KYOCERA COMMAND CENTER Operation Guide.
Pat
er
s
s
t
r
aat106108
2300T
ur
nhout
T
el
:
014/
42.
55.
99
2-23
i
nf
o@v
anmec
hel
en.
be
www.
v
anmec
hel
en.
be
F
ax
:
014/
42.
32.
64
Preparation before Use > COMMAND CENTER (Settings for E-mail)
Sending E-mail
Specifying the SMTP settings allows you to send images loaded onto this machine as E-mail attachments.
To use this function, this machine must be connected to a mail server using the SMTP protocol.
Before sending images loaded onto this machine as E-mail attachments, check the following:
•
The network environment used to connect this machine to the mail server: A full-time connection via a LAN is
recommended.
•
SMTP Settings: Use COMMAND CENTER to register the IP address or host name of the SMTP server.
•
If limits have been set on the size of E-mail messages, it may not be possible to send very large E-mails.
1
Display the screen.
1
2
2
3
Configure the function.
Enter the correct settings in each field.
Item
Description
SMTP Protocol
Enables or disables SMTP protocol. To use E-mail, this protocol must be
enabled.
SMTP Port Number
Set the SMTP Port Number or use the SMTP default port 25.
SMTP Server Name
Enter the SMTP server IP address or its name. The maximum length of
the SMTP server name and IP address is 64 characters. If entering the
name, a DNS server address must also be configured. The DNS server
address may be entered on the TCP/IP General tab.
SMTP Server Timeout
Set the amount of time to wait before time-out in seconds.
Authentication Protocol
Enables or disables the SMTP authentication protocol or sets POP before
SMTP as the protocol. The SMTP authentication supports Microsoft
Exchange 2000.
Authenticate as
Authentication can be set from three POP3 accounts or you can choose a
different account.
Login User Name
When Other is selected for Authenticate, the login user name set here will
be used for SMTP authentication. The maximum length of the login user
name is 64 characters.
2-24
Preparation before Use > COMMAND CENTER (Settings for E-mail)
Item
3
Description
Login Password
When Other is selected for Authenticate, the password set here will be
used for authentication. The maximum length of the login password is 64
characters.
POP before SMTP
Timeout
Set the amount of time to wait before time-out in seconds when you have
selected POP before SMTP as the Authentication Protocol.
Test
This will test if the SMTP connection can be successfully established.
E-mail Size Limit
Enter the maximum size of E-mail that can be sent in kilobytes. When the
value is 0, no maximum size is set.
Sender Address
Enter the E-mail address of the person responsible for the machine, such
as the machine administrator, so that a reply or non-delivery report will go
to a person rather than to the machine. The sender address must be
entered correctly for SMTP authentication. The maximum length of the
sender address is 128 characters.
Signature
Enter the signature. The signature is free form text that will appear at the
end of the E-mail body. It is often used for further identification of the
machine. The maximum length of the signature is 512 characters.
Domain Restriction
Enter the domain names that can be permitted or rejected. The maximum
length of the domain name is 32 characters. You can also specify E-mail
addresses.
Click [Submit].
2-25
Preparation before Use > COMMAND CENTER (Settings for E-mail)
2-26
3
Common Operations
This chapter explains the following topics:
Loading Paper .................................................................................................................................................... 3-2
Before Loading Paper .............................................................................................................................. 3-2
Loading Paper in the Cassettes ............................................................................................................... 3-3
Loading Paper in the Multi Purpose Tray ................................................................................................. 3-5
Loading Originals ............................................................................................................................................... 3-7
Placing Originals on the Platen ................................................................................................................ 3-7
Loading Originals in the Document Processor ........................................................................................ 3-8
Checking the Equipment's Serial Number ....................................................................................................... 3-10
Checking the Counter ....................................................................................................................................... 3-11
Login/Logout .................................................................................................................................................... 3-12
Favorites .......................................................................................................................................................... 3-14
Registering Favorites ............................................................................................................................. 3-14
Editing and Deleting Favorites ............................................................................................................... 3-17
Using Favorites ...................................................................................................................................... 3-19
Shortcuts .......................................................................................................................................................... 3-21
Registering Shortcuts ............................................................................................................................. 3-21
Editing and Deleting Shortcuts ............................................................................................................... 3-23
Using Shortcuts ...................................................................................................................................... 3-24
Quick Setup Wizard ......................................................................................................................................... 3-25
Help Screen ..................................................................................................................................................... 3-27
Canceling Jobs ................................................................................................................................................ 3-28
Using Various Functions .................................................................................................................................. 3-29
Original Size .......................................................................................................................................... 3-31
Original Orientation ................................................................................................................................ 3-33
Mixed Size Originals .............................................................................................................................. 3-34
2-sided/Book Original ............................................................................................................................ 3-36
Continuous Scan ................................................................................................................................... 3-38
Paper Selection ..................................................................................................................................... 3-40
Paper Output ......................................................................................................................................... 3-41
Collate/Offset ......................................................................................................................................... 3-42
Margin .................................................................................................................................................... 3-44
Staple ..................................................................................................................................................... 3-47
Density ................................................................................................................................................... 3-49
Scan Resolution ..................................................................................................................................... 3-50
Original Image ....................................................................................................................................... 3-51
Sharpness .............................................................................................................................................. 3-52
Background Density Adjust .................................................................................................................... 3-53
Prevent Bleed-through ........................................................................................................................... 3-54
Zoom ...................................................................................................................................................... 3-55
File Format ............................................................................................................................................. 3-56
Color Selection ...................................................................................................................................... 3-58
Job Finish Notice ................................................................................................................................... 3-59
File Name Entry ..................................................................................................................................... 3-61
Priority Override ..................................................................................................................................... 3-62
3-1
Common Operations > Loading Paper
Loading Paper
Paper can be loaded standardly in the cassette and the multi purpose tray. A paper feeder is also available as an option
(refer to Optional Equipment on page 11-2).
Before Loading Paper
When you open a new package of paper, fan the sheets to separate them slightly prior to loading in the following steps.
1 Bend the whole set of sheets to swell them in the middle.
2 Hold the stack at both ends and stretch it while keeping the entire stack swelled.
3 Raise the right and left hands alternately to create a gap and feed air between the papers.
4 Finally, align the papers on a level, flat table.
If the paper is curled or folded, straighten it before loading. Paper that is curled or folded may
cause a jam.
IMPORTANT
If you copy onto used paper (paper already used for copying), do not use paper that
is stapled or clipped together. This may damage the machine or cause poor image
quality.
NOTE
If printouts are curled or not neatly stapled, turn the stack in the cassette upside down.
If you use special paper such as letterhead, paper with holes or paper with pre-prints like
logo or company name, refer to Paper on page 11-10.
Avoid exposing opened paper to high temperatures and high humidity as dampness can be a
cause of problems. Seal any remaining paper after loading in the multi purpose tray or
cassettes back in the paper storage bag.
If the machine will not be used for a prolonged period, protect all paper from humidity by
removing it from the cassettes and sealing it in the paper storage bag.
3-2
Common Operations > Loading Paper
Loading Paper in the Cassettes
The standard cassette will each hold plain paper, recycled paper or color paper. The standard cassette holds up to 500
sheets of plain paper (80 g/m²).
The following paper sizes are supported: Ledger, Letter-R, Letter, Legal, Statement-R, Oficio II, A3, B4, A4, A4-R, A5-R,
B5, B5-R, Folio, 216 × 340 mm, 8K, 16K-R, and 16K.
NOTE
You should not use inkjet printer paper or any paper with a special surface coating. (Such paper may cause paper
jams or other faults.)
When using media types other than plain paper (such as recycled or colored paper), always specify the media type
setting. (Refer to Media Type on page 9-8) The cassettes can hold paper with weights up to 163 g/m². If you are using
a paper weight between 106 and 163 g/m², set the media type to Thick.
Do not load thick paper that is heavier than 163 g/m² in the cassettes. Use the multi purpose tray for paper that is
heavier than 163 g/m².
If the machine will not be used for a prolonged period, protect all paper from humidity by removing it from the
cassettes and sealing it in the paper storage bag.
1
Adjust the cassette size.
1
2
Adjust the cassette size to reflect the size of paper being loaded. Paper sizes are marked on
the cassette.
NOTE
When using 11 × 17” (ledger) paper, lay the paper length guide down flat.
3-3
Common Operations > Loading Paper
2
Load paper.
1
2
IMPORTANT
Load the paper with the print side facing up.
Before loading the paper, be sure that it is not curled or folded. Paper that is curled or
folded may cause paper jams.
Ensure that the loaded paper does not exceed the level indicator (see the figure).
When loading the paper, keep the side that was closest the package seal facing up.
The paper length and width guides must be adjusted to the paper size. Loading the
paper without adjusting these guides may cause skewed feeding and paper jams.
Be sure that the paper length and width guides rest securely against the paper. If
there is a gap, readjust the guides to fit the paper.
3-4
Common Operations > Loading Paper
Loading Paper in the Multi Purpose Tray
The multi purpose tray will hold up to 100 sheets of A4 or smaller plain paper (80 g/m²) or up to 25 sheets of plain paper
(80 g/m²) lager than A4.
The multi purpose tray accepts paper sizes from A3 to A6 and Hagaki and from Ledger to Statement-R, 8K, 16K-R and
16K. Be sure to use the multi purpose tray when you print on any special paper.
IMPORTANT
When using media types other than plain paper (such as recycled or colored paper), always specify the media
type setting. (Refer to Quick Setup Wizard on page 3-25.) If you are using a paper weight of 106 g/m² or more,
set the media type to Thick.
The capacity of the multi purpose tray is as follows.
•
A4 or smaller plain paper (80 g/m²), recycled paper or color paper: 100 sheets
•
B4 or larger plain paper (80 g/m²), recycled paper or color paper: 25 sheets
•
Hagaki: 20 sheet
•
Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Envelope #10 (Commercial #10), Monarch, Youkei 4, Youkei 2: 5 sheets
•
Heavy paper (106 to 256 g/m²): 10 sheets (when using heavy paper with a weight of 164 g/m² or greater, only A4/
Letter or smaller sheets can be loaded)
NOTE
When you load custom size paper, enter the paper size by referring to Paper Size on page 9-8.
When you use special paper such as thick paper, select the media type by referring to Media Type on page 9-8.
1
Adjust the multi purpose tray size.
1
2
When loading paper sizes from A3 to B4 and Ledger to Legal, extend the support tray section
of the multi purpose tray.
3-5
Common Operations > Loading Paper
?
2
Load paper.
Insert the paper along the paper width guides into the tray until it stops.
IMPORTANT
Load the paper with the print side facing down.
Curled paper must be uncurled before use.
Straighten the top edge if it is curled.
When loading paper into the multi purpose tray, check that there is no paper left over
in the tray from a previous job before loading the paper. If there is just a small amount
of paper left over in the multi purpose tray and you want to add more, first remove the
left-over paper from the tray and include it with the new paper before loading the
paper back into the tray.
When you load envelopes or cardstock in the multi purpose tray
Close the flap.
Return postcard
(Oufuku Hagaki)
Cardstock
(Hagaki)
Portrait form
envelopes
Landscape form
envelopes
Open the flap.
Load envelope with the print side facing down.
IMPORTANT
Use unfolded return postcard (Oufuku Hagaki).
How to load envelopes (orientation and facing) will differ depending on the type of
envelope. Be sure to load it in correctly, otherwise printing may be done in the wrong
direction or on the wrong face.
3-6
Common Operations > Loading Originals
Loading Originals
Placing Originals on the Platen
You may place books or magazines on the platen in addition to ordinary sheet originals.
NOTE
Before opening the document processor, be sure that there are no originals left on the original table or on the original
eject table. Originals left on the original table or on the original eject table may fall off when the document processor is
opened.
Shadows may be produced around the edges and in the middle of open-faced originals.
Align it flush against the
original size indicator plates
with the back left corner as
the reference point.
Put the scanning
side facedown.
Open the original cover or document processor, and place the original.
CAUTION
Do not leave the document processor open as there is a danger of personal injury.
IMPORTANT
Do not push the original cover forcefully when you close it. Excessive pressure may
crack the platen glass.
When placing books or magazines on the machine, do so with the document
processor or original cover in the open position.
3-7
Common Operations > Loading Originals
Loading Originals in the Document Processor
The document processor automatically scans each sheet of multiple originals. Both sides of two-sided originals are
scanned.
Originals Supported by the Document Processor
Weight
45 to 160 g/m² (duplex: 50 to 120 g/m²)
Size
Maximum A3 to Minimum A5
Maximum Ledger to Minimum Statement-R
Capacity
Plain paper (80 g/m²), Colored paper, Recycled paper: 50 sheets (Mixed size originals: 30 sheets)
Thick paper (157 g/m²): 25 sheets
Thick paper (120 g/m²): 33 sheets
Art paper: 1 sheet
Originals Not Supported by the Document Processor
•
Soft originals such as vinyl sheets
•
Transparencies such as OHP film
•
Carbon paper
•
Originals with very slippery surfaces
•
Originals with adhesive tape or glue
•
Wet originals
•
Originals with correction fluid which is not dried
•
Irregularly shaped (non-rectangular) originals
•
Originals with cut-out sections
•
Crumpled paper
•
Originals with folds (Straighten the folds before loading. Failure to do so may cause the originals to jam).
•
Originals bound with clips or staples (Remove the clips or staples and straighten curls, wrinkles or creases before
loading. Failure to do so may cause the originals to jam).
How to Load Originals
IMPORTANT
Before loading originals, be sure that there are no originals left on the original eject table. Originals left on the
original eject table may cause the new originals to jam.
?
1
Adjust the original table size.
3-8
Common Operations > Loading Originals
?
2
Load Originals.
Put the side to be scanned (or the first side of two-sided originals) face-up. Slide the leading
edge into the document processor as far as it will go.
NOTE
Ensure that loaded originals do not exceed the level indicator. Exceeding the maximum
level may cause the originals to jam (see the figure).
Confirm that the original width guides exactly fit the originals. If there is a gap, readjust the
original width guides. The gap may cause the originals to jam.
Originals with punched holes or perforated lines should be placed in such a way that the
holes or perforations will be scanned last (not first).
Original Loaded Indicator
The original loaded indicator lits depending on how originals are placed.
Indications and their status are as follows.
•
Green (left indicator) lit: Original is placed properly.
3-9
Common Operations > Checking the Equipment's Serial Number
Checking the Equipment's Serial Number
The equipment's serial number is printed in the location shown in the figure.
10.9
5.8
NOTE
You'll need the equipment's serial number when contacting your Service Representative.
Please check the number before contacting your Service Representative.
3-10
Common Operations > Checking the Counter
Checking the Counter
Check the number of pages printed and scanned.
1
Display the screen.
2
GB0054_03
1
Use [
] to scroll up and down.
GB0584_00
Check the counter.
Select the job you wish to check.
[Printed Pages]
] or [
] to scroll up and down.
GB0585_00
Use [
Scroll the screen to check the number of pages. Pressing [Count by Paper Size] and then
[Black & White] allows you to check the number of pages by paper size.
[Scanned Pages]
GB0589_00
2
] or [
3-11
Common Operations > Login/Logout
Login/Logout
If user login administration is enabled, it is necessary to enter the login user name and password to use the machine.
Refer to Adding a User on page 9-30 for the default login user name and password.
NOTE
You will be unable to login if you forget your login user name or login password. In this event, login with administrator
privileges and change your login user name or login password.
Login
Normal login
Enter the login user name.
2
GB0723_00
1
GB0057_00
1
If this screen is displayed during operations, press [Keyboard] to enter the login user name.
The name can also be entered using the numeric keypad.
Refer to Character Entry Method on page 11-7 for details on entering characters.
2
Enter the login password.
GB0057_00
1
3
Press [Password] to enter the login password.
Log in.
GB0723_01
3
NOTE
If Network Authentication is selected as the user authentication method, either Local or
Network can be selected as the authentication destination.
3-12
GB0057_01
2
Common Operations > Login/Logout
GB0023_00
Simple Login
If this screen is displayed during operations, select a user and log in.
NOTE
If a user password is required, an input screen will be displayed.
Refer to Simple Login on page 9-38.
Logout
To logout from the machine, press the Logout key to return to the login user name/password entry screen.
Users are automatically logged out in the following circumstances:
•
When the machine is put to Sleep by pressing the Power key.
•
When the Auto Sleep function is activated.
•
When the auto panel reset function is activated.
•
When Auto Low Power Mode is activated.
•
When the machine is placed in Low Power Mode by pressing the Energy Saver key.
3-13
Common Operations > Favorites
Favorites
Frequently used functions can be registered as favorites so that they can be called up easily.
Registering Favorites
When registering a favorite, you can choose from two methods for calling it up:
•
Wizard mode: Registered settings are called up in order and configured as you check or change each one.
•
Program mode: Settings are called up immediately when you press the key to which they are registered.
NOTE
Up to 20 settings can be registered as favorites.
Configure the function.
GB0001_01
1
When registering favorites in program mode, configure the copy function, send function, fax
function (option), destination, or other setting to register.
2
Display the screen.
2
GB0056_00
1
GB0779_00
3
Select the job type.
3-14
GB0764_00
2
1
GB0763_00
3
Common Operations > Favorites
When you select the wizard mode
] or [
] to scroll up and down.
GB0769_00
Use [
Select the screen to display. Checked items will be shown as part of the wizard.
NOTE
When the job type is Copy, the Destination Recall Method screen will not be displayed.
4
Enter a name.
GB0057_80
1
2
Refer to Character Entry Method on page 11-7 for details on entering characters.
Check the settings.
Check the settings and change or add information as needed.
[Name]
2
3
GB0057_81
GB0766_00
1
[Number]
1
3-15
3
GB0760_00
2
GB0766_00
5
Common Operations > Favorites
[Permission]
1
GB0305_00
GB0766_02
2
Configures permission settings for favorites to determine how they are shared with other
users.
[Destination]
2
GB0771_00
GB0766_02
1
When the job type is [Send] or [FAX], selects the Destination Recall Method.
[Functions]
GB0766_02
1
GB0769_01
2
When you select the wizard mode, check the screen to display.
[Function Type]
2
Register the favorite.
GB0766_00
6
3-16
GB0775_00
GB0766_02
1
Common Operations > Favorites
Editing and Deleting Favorites
This section describes how to edit name and permission of the registered favorites and how to delete favorites.
1
2
Edit or delete a favorite.
To edit a favorite
1 Select the favorite you wish to edit.
2
GB0780_00
GB0779_00
1
2 Edit the favorite.
[Name]
2
3
GB0057_82
3
GB0760_00
1
GB0781_00
2
GB0056_00
Display the screen.
[Number]
2
1
GB0781_00
1
3-17
Common Operations > Favorites
[Permission]
1
GB0305_00
GB0781_02
2
Configures permission settings for favorites to determine how they are shared with other users.
3 Register the favorite.
1
GB0781_00
2
To delete
2
GB0782_00
GB0779_00
1
3
Select the favorite you wish to delete.
3-18
Common Operations > Favorites
Using Favorites
Call up settings from a favorite.
Display the screen.
2
Select a favorite.
GB0056_00
1
When using the wizard mode
GB0057_99
GB0008_99
GB0016_99
1 The registered screens are displayed in order. Make the desired settings.
2 Confirm the settings and start the job.
] or [
] to scroll up and down.
GB0820_00
Use [
NOTE
To edit the settings, press [<Back] and make changes as desired.
3-19
Common Operations > Favorites
When using the program mode
Select a favorite to call up registered settings.
Press the Start key to start the job.
3-20
Common Operations > Shortcuts
Shortcuts
Frequently used function screens can be registered as shortcuts so that they can be called up easily.
Registering Shortcuts
You can register up to 2 shortcuts for copying functions, sending functions, and functions set for document box.
The following types of shortcuts are available:
Private Shortcut
Private shortcuts are only available for use by the logged in user. They can only be set while using
user login administration.
Shared Shortcut
Shared shortcuts can be used by all machine users. When using user login administration, shared
shortcuts can only be set by users who have logged in as administrators.
Display the screen.
GB0001_01
1
2
GB0002_00
1
Press [Functions] on the Copy, Send, or Document Box screen and then [Add/Edit Shortcut].
Select [Add].
3
Select the key.
GB0791_00
GB0790_00
2
Select the key to which you wish to register the shortcut.
NOTE
If you select a shortcut number already registered, the currently registered shortcut can be
replaced with a new one.
3-21
Common Operations > Shortcuts
Select the function.
GB0792_00
4
Select the function screen to display with the shortcut.
5
Enter the shortcut name.
GB0057_04
1
2
Up to 24 characters can be entered.
Refer to Character Entry Method on page 11-7 for details on entering characters.
Register the shortcut.
GB0793_00
6
Confirm the settings and press [Save]
3-22
Common Operations > Shortcuts
Editing and Deleting Shortcuts
Change shortcut number/name or delete shortcut.
Display the screen.
2
GB0001_04
1
GB0002_00
1
Press [Functions] on the Copy, Send, or Document Box screen and then [Add/Edit Shortcut].
Edit or delete a shortcut.
To edit a shortcut
1 Select the shortcut type and number you wish to edit.
1
GB0796_00
GB0790_01
2
2 Edit the shortcut.
[No.]
1
GB0794_00
GB0797_00
2
[Name]
3-23
3
GB0057_60
2
1
GB0797_00
2
Common Operations > Shortcuts
3 Register the shortcut.
1
GB0797_00
2
To delete
2
DB0790_01
GB0798_00
1
3
Select the shortcut you wish to delete.
Using Shortcuts
GB0001_04
The registered shortcut will be displayed on the Copy, Send, Print from USB Memory or
Polling Box, or Save to USB Memory initial screen. Pressing [Shortcut] will switch to the
registered function's screen.
3-24
Common Operations > Quick Setup Wizard
Quick Setup Wizard
Make the following basic settings as instructed by the Wizard:
Paper Setup
Sets the paper size and media type for the paper cassettes and the multi purpose tray.
Energy Saver Setup
FAX Setup**
Cassette 1 - Paper Size, Cassette 1 - Media Type
2. Cassette 2*
Cassette 2 - Paper Size, Cassette 2 - Media Type
3. Cassette 3*
Cassette 3 - Paper Size, Cassette 3 - Media Type
4. MP Tray
MP Tray - Paper Size, MP Tray - Media Type
Configures sleep mode and low-power mode.
1. Sleep Mode
Sleep Mode - Auto Sleep, Sleep Mode - Sleep Timer,
Sleep Mode - Sleep Level
2. Low Power Mode
Low Power Mode - Low Power Timer
Configures basic fax settings.
1. Dialing/RX Mode
Dialing/RX Mode - Dialing Mode, Dialing/RX Mode - Reception Mode,
Dialing/RX Mode - Auto (DRD)
2. Local FAX Info.
Local FAX Info. - Local FAX Number, Local FAX Info. - Local FAX ID,
Local FAX Info. - Print Position
3. Sound Volume
Sound Volume - Confirmation, Speaker Volume, Monitor Volume
4. Rings
Rings - Confirmation, Answering Machine, FAX/TEL Switch
5. Output
Output - Paper Output, Output - Reduced RX Size
6. Redial
Redial - Retry Times
This function is displayed when the optional paper feeder is installed.
This function is displayed when the optional fax is installed.
1
Display the screen.
2
2
GB0054_00
1
Select a function.
GB0840_00
*
**
1. Cassette 1
3-25
Common Operations > Quick Setup Wizard
GB0841_00
Configure the function.
Start the wizard. Follow the instructions on the screen to configure settings.
GB0846_00
3
NOTE
If you experience difficulty configuring the settings, refer to Help Screen on page 3-27.
End
Exits the wizard. Settings configured so far are applied.
<< Previous
Returns to the previous item.
Skip >>
Advances to the next item without setting the current item.
Next >
Advances to the next screen.
< Back
Returns to the previous screen.
3-26
Common Operations > Help Screen
Help Screen
If you have difficulty operating the machine, you can check how to operate it using the touch panel.
GB0004_00
When the [?] (help) is displayed on the touch panel, you can press it to display the Help screen.
How to read the screen
Help titles
Displays information about
functions and machine
operation.
Scrolls up and down when
the help text cannot be
displayed in its entirety on a
single screen.
GH0001_00
Closes the Help screen and
returns to the original
screen.
3-27
Common Operations > Canceling Jobs
Canceling Jobs
Cancel any print or send job being executed.
1
Press the Stop key.
2
Cancel a job.
GB0222_01
When there is a job is being scanned
Canceling… will be displayed, and the current job will be canceled.
When there is a job printing or on standby
1
GB0717_00
3
2
Displays details for individual jobs.
Select the job you wish to cancel and press [Job Cancel].
NOTE
The current print job is temporarily interrupted. Continues without temporarily interrupting
jobs being sent.
You can also cancel executing jobs and jobs on standby after checking their status. Refer to
Status / Job Cancel on page 8-1.
3-28
Common Operations > Using Various Functions
Using Various Functions
This section describes common functionality that can be configured for copying, sending, and the document box.
1
Display the screen.
Press the key of each function.
When using USB memory, plug it into the USB memory slot (A1).
Press [Yes] on the displayed screen.
When printing from USB memory, select the file to be printed and press
[Print].
When storing a document to USB memory, select the folder where the
file will be stored and press [Menu] and then [Store File].
For details, refer to Printing Documents Stored in Removable USB
Memory on page 7-2 or Saving Documents to USB Memory (Scan to
USB) on page 7-5.
NOTE
If the touch panel is turned off, press the Energy Saver key or the
Power key and wait for the machine to warm up.
2
Select the functions.
Select the functions to use.
Press [Functions] to display all the functions.
GB0001_01
Refer to Common Functionality on page 3-30.
3-29
Common Operations > Using Various Functions
Common Functionality
Functionality related to originals
What do you want to do?
Reference Page
Specify the original size.
Original Size  page 3-31
Specify the original orientation to scan in the correct direction.
Original Orientation  page 3-33
Scan mixed size originals.
Mixed Size Originals  page 3-34
Automatically scan 2-sided originals.
2-sided/Book Original  page 3-36
Scan a large number of originals separately and then produce as one job.
Continuous Scan  page 3-38
Functionality related to document quality
What do you want to do?
Reference Page
Specify the paper size and type.
Paper Selection  page 3-40
Change the paper output.
Paper Output  page 3-41
Collate the output documents in page order.
Collate/Offset  page 3-42
Offset the output documents by set.
Add margins (white space).
Margin  page 3-44
Staple in the output documents.
Staple  page 3-47
Adjust the density.
Density  page 3-49
Set the resolution at which to scan originals.
Scan Resolution  page 3-50
Select original image type for best results.
Original Image  page 3-51
Emphasize the outline of texts or lines.
Sharpness  page 3-52
Blur the image outline.
Darken or lighten the background (i.e., the area with no text or images) of originals.
Background Density Adjust 
page 3-53
Prevent bleed-through for 2-sided originals.
Prevent Bleed-through  page 3-54
Enlarge or shrink originals according to the sending or storing size.
Zoom  page 3-55
Select the file format for images being sent or stored.
File Format  page 3-56
Change the color mode for images being sent or stored.
Color Selection  page 3-58
Send notice by e-mail when a job is complete.
Job Finish Notice  page 3-59
Add a file name to the job to easily check its status.
File Name Entry  page 3-61
Suspend the current job and override it to give a new job top priority.
Priority Override  page 3-62
3-30
Common Operations > Using Various Functions
Original Size
Copy
Send
Specify the original size to be scanned.
Auto
Automatically detects the size of the original.
Metric
Select from A3, A4-R, A4, A5-R, A5, A6-R, B4, B5-R, B5, B6-R, B6, Folio, or 216 × 340 mm.
inch
Select from Ledger, Letter-R, Letter, Legal, Statement-R, Statement, 11 × 15", or Oficio II.
Others
Select from 8K, 16K-R, 16K, Hagaki, Oufuku Hagaki, or Custom*
Size Entry
Enter the size.
Scan to
USB
Inch models — Horizontal: 2 to 17" (in 0.01" increments), Vertical: 2 to 11.69" (in 0.01" increments)
Metric models — Horizontal: 50 to 432 mm (in 1 mm increments), Vertical: 50 to 297 mm (in 1 mm
increments)
For instructions on how to specify the custom original size, refer to Custom Original Size on page 9-9.
NOTE
Be sure to always specify the original size when using custom size originals.
1
Display the screen.
1 Referring to Using Various Functions on page 3-29, display the screen.
2 Press [Functions] and then [Original Size].
GB0001_01
1
GB0002_00
2
Use [
2
Select the original size.
[Auto]
GB0025_00
*
3-31
] or [
] to scroll up and down.
Common Operations > Using Various Functions
[Metric], [inch], or [Others]
2
GB0026_00
GB0025_00
1
Use [
] or [
] to scroll up and down.
Select the original size.
[Size Entry]
2
3
Press the text box displaying the numbers and use [-]/[+] or the numeric keypad to enter a
value.
3-32
GB0029_00
GB0025_00
1
Common Operations > Using Various Functions
Original Orientation
Copy
Select the orientation of the original document top edge to scan correct direction.
Send
Scan to
USB
To use any of the following functions, the document's original orientation must be set.
Margin
•
Combine
•
Staple (option)
When placing originals on the platen
Top Edge on Top
Top Edge on Left
When placing originals on the document processor
Top Edge on Top
1
Top Edge on Left
Display the screen.
1 Referring to Using Various Functions on page 3-29, display the screen.
2 Press [Functions] and then [Original Orientation].
2
1
GB0002_00
•
GB0001_01
Duplex
Use [
2
Select the function.
GB0036_01
•
Select the original orientation.
3-33
] or [
] to scroll up and down.
Common Operations > Using Various Functions
Mixed Size Originals
Copy
Send
Scans all sheets in the document processor, even if they are of different sizes.
Scan to
USB
Supported Combinations of Originals
•
B4 and B5
•
Ledger and Letter (A3 and A4)
•
Ledger and Letter-R (Folio and A4-R)
NOTE
When mixing the original sizes as using the following combination: Folio and A4-R, make
sure to set Original Auto Detect to [On] for [Folio]. For more information, refer to Original
Auto Detect on page 9-10.
Up to 30 sheets can be placed in the document processor for mixed size originals.
Display the screen.
1 Referring to Using Various Functions on page 3-29, display the screen.
2 Press [Functions] and then [Mixed Size Originals].
1
GB0002_00
2
GB0001_01
1
Use [
3-34
] or [
] to scroll up and down.
Common Operations > Using Various Functions
Select the function.
GB0035_00
2
3-35
Common Operations > Using Various Functions
2-sided/Book Original
Send
Select the type and orientation of the binding based on the original.
Scan to
USB
1-sided
Set when using a 1-sided sheet original.
2-sided*
Set when using a 2-sided sheet original that will be bound on the left or
right.
Book
Set when using a book original such as a magazine or book that is bound
on the left.
Other
Settings
2-sided/
Book
Original
1-sided
Set when using a 1-sided sheet original.
2-sided (Binding Left/
Right)*
Set when using a 2-sided sheet original that will be bound on the left or
right.
2-sided (Binding Top)*
Set when using a 2-sided sheet original that will be bound at the top.
Book (Binding Left)
Set when using a book original such as a magazine or book that is bound
on the left.
Book (Binding Right)
Set when using a book original such as a magazine or book that is bound
on the right.
Original Orientation**
Requires the document processor.
This function is displayed when [2-sided (Binding Left/Right)] or [2-sided (Binding Top)] is selected.
Display the screen.
1 Referring to Using Various Functions on page 3-29, display the screen.
2
Send
2
1
GB0081_01
1
GB0055_00
*
**
Select the orientation of the original document top edge to scan correct
direction.
Use [
3-36
] or [
] to scroll up and down.
Common Operations > Using Various Functions
GB0096_00
Scan to USB
Select the type of original.
GB0013_00
[2-sided] or [Book]
The [2-sided] setting is only displayed when the document processor is installed.
[Others]
GB0013_00
1
2 Select the type of original.
2
GB0011_00
GB0014_00
1
Use [
] or [
] to scroll up and down.
The document processor is required in order to use 2-sided sheet originals.
3 Select the original orientation.
1
3-37
GB0015_00
2
GB0014_01
2
Common Operations > Using Various Functions
Continuous Scan
Copy
Scan a large number of originals in separate batches and then produce as one job. Originals will
be scanned continuously until you press [Finish Scan].
1
Send
Scan to
USB
Display the screen.
1 Referring to Using Various Functions on page 3-29, display the screen.
2 Press [Functions] and then [Continuous Scan].
GB0001_01
1
GB0002_02
2
Use [
Select the function.
3
Scan the originals.
] to scroll up and down.
GB0043_00
2
] or [
Load the original and press the Start key to start scanning.
Once the original has been scanned, load the next original and press the Start key. Use the
same procedure to scan any remaining originals.
3-38
Common Operations > Using Various Functions
Finish scanning.
GB0222_00
4
Start copying, sending, or storing.
3-39
Common Operations > Using Various Functions
Paper Selection
Copy
Select the cassette or multi-purpose tray that contains the required paper size.
Print from
USB
NOTE
Specify in advance the size and type of the paper loaded in the cassette (refer to Quick Setup Wizard on page 3-25).
1
Display the screen.
1 Referring to Using Various Functions on page 3-29, display the screen.
GB0001_01
2 Press [Paper Selection].
Select the paper source.
GB0004_00
2
If [Auto] is selected, the paper matching the size of the original is selected automatically.
[2] (Cassette 2) and [3] (Cassette 3) are displayed when the optional paper feeder is installed.
[M] indicates the MP tray.
3-40
Common Operations > Using Various Functions
Paper Output
Copy
Set paper output to document finisher or job separator tray.
Inner Tray
Places pages face down in the inner tray.
Finisher Tray
Places pages face down in the optional document finisher tray.
Job Separator Tray
Places pages face down in the job separator tray.
Print from
USB
NOTE
To change default destination, refer to Paper Output on page 9-13 for details.
1
Display the screen.
1 Referring to Using Various Functions on page 3-29, display the screen.
2 Press [Functions] and then [Paper Output].
GB0001_01
1
GB0002_00
2
Use [
Select the output destination.
GB0031_00
2
3-41
] or [
] to scroll up and down.
Common Operations > Using Various Functions
Collate/Offset
Copy
Offset the output by page or set.
Print from
USB
Collate
Scan multiple originals and deliver complete sets of copies as required according to page
number.
Offset
Without Document Finisher (Option)
When you use offsetting, printed copies are produced after rotating each set (or page) by 90°.
NOTE
To offset without a document finisher, load the same size paper into a second paper source
with a different orientation.
The paper sizes supported in Offset are A4, B5, Letter and 16K.
With Document Finisher (Option)
When you use offsetting, printed copies are segregated after each set of copies (or after each
page).
1
Display the screen.
1 Referring to Using Various Functions on page 3-29, display the screen.
3-42
Common Operations > Using Various Functions
GB0001_01
2 Press [Collate/Offset].
Select the function.
GB0021_00
2
3-43
Common Operations > Using Various Functions
Margin
Copy
Add margins (white space).
Print from
USB
Margin Width
Input units
Margin Width
Inch Models
-0.75 to 0.75" (in 0.01" increments)
Metric Models
-18 mm to 18 mm (in 1-mm increments)
Margin on the Back Side
When duplex copying, you can also specify the margin on the back side.
Auto
When [Auto] is selected, an appropriate margin is applied automatically on the rear page depending on a margin
specified for the front page and a binding orientation.
Manual
Enables you to specify the front and back settings separately.
NOTE
You can set the default margin width. Refer to Margin on page 9-12 for details.
Display the screen.
1 Referring to Using Various Functions on page 3-29, display the screen.
2 Press [Functions] and then [Margin].
1
GB0002_02
2
GB0001_01
1
Use [
3-44
] or [
] to scroll up and down.
Common Operations > Using Various Functions
2
Enter the margin width.
1
GB0038_00
1
2
2
3
Press the text box and use [-]/[+] to enter a value.
Specify the margin on the back side.
GB0039_00
1
NOTE
[Original Orientation] is not displayed when printing a document from USB memory.
[Auto]
GB0041_00
3
3-45
GB0040_00
GB0039_00
1
Common Operations > Using Various Functions
[Manual]
2
3
GB0042_00
GB0041_00
1
Press the text box and use [-]/[+] to enter a value.
Select the original orientation.
1
NOTE
[Original Orientation] is not displayed when printing a document from USB memory.
3-46
GB0015_00
2
GB0041_00
4
Common Operations > Using Various Functions
Staple
Copy
Staple documents. In addition, you can specify the staple position.
Print from
USB
NOTE
Stapling requires the document finisher.
The following stapling options and orientations are available.
Original Orientation:
Top Edge (Back Edge)
Original Orientation:
Left Top Edge (Left top corner)
Cassette Paper Load
Direction
Cassette Paper Load
Direction
Display the screen.
1 Referring to Using Various Functions on page 3-29, display the screen.
2 Press [Functions] and then [Staple].
1
GB0002_05
2
GB0001_01
1
Use [
3-47
] or [
] to scroll up and down.
Common Operations > Using Various Functions
Select the staple position.
GB0032_00
[1 staple] or [2 staples]
[Others]
GB0032_00
1
2 Select the staple position.
2
GB0034_00
GB0033_00
1
Use [
] or [
] to scroll up and down.
3 Select the original orientation.
1
NOTE
[Original Orientation] is not displayed when printing a document from USB memory.
3-48
GB0015_02
2
GB0033_01
2
Common Operations > Using Various Functions
Density
Copy
Adjust density using 7 levels.
1
Send
Scan to
USB
Display the screen.
1 Referring to Using Various Functions on page 3-29, display the screen.
2
GB0096_00
Scan to USB
GB0001_01
Copy
Send
GB0055_00
1
GB0081_02
2
Use [
Adjust density.
GB0008_00
2
Press [-3] to [+3] (Lighter - Darker) to adjust density.
3-49
] or [
] to scroll up and down.
Common Operations > Using Various Functions
Scan Resolution
Send
Select fineness of scanning resolution.
Scan to
USB
The selectable resolution is [200×100dpi], [200×200dpi Fine], [200×400dpi Super], [300×300dpi], [400×400dpi Ultra], or
[600×600dpi].
NOTE
The larger the number, the better the image resolution. However, better resolution also means larger file sizes and
longer send times.
1
Display the screen.
1 Referring to Using Various Functions on page 3-29, display the screen.
2
Send
GB0055_00
1
GB0081_01
2
Use [
GB0096_00
Scan to USB
Select the resolution.
GB0085_00
2
3-50
] or [
] to scroll up and down.
Common Operations > Using Various Functions
Original Image
Copy
Send
Select original image type for best results.
Text+Photo
Best for originals which contain a mixture of text and photos.
Photo
Best for photographs.
Text
Sharply renders pencil text and fine lines.
Graphic/Map*
Best for graphics and maps.
Copy/Printout*
Best for documents printed on this machine originally.
Text (for OCR)**
For documents to be read by OCR.
This function can only be set while copying.
This function can only be used when the color mode is Black & White or Auto (color/B&W) (when sending and storing).
1
Display the screen.
1 Referring to Using Various Functions on page 3-29, display the screen.
2 Press [Functions] and then [Original Image].
GB0001_01
1
GB0002_01
2
Use [
] or [
] to scroll up and down.
Select the image quality.
Copy
Send/Scan to USB
3-51
GB0037_01
2
GB0037_00
*
**
Scan to
USB
Common Operations > Using Various Functions
Sharpness
Copy
Adjust the sharpness of the image.
Send
Scan to
USB
When copying penciled originals with rough or broken lines, clear copies can be taken by adjusting sharpness toward
[Sharpen]. When copying images made up of patterned dots such as magazine photos, in which moire* patterns appear,
edge softening and weakening of the moire effect can be obtained by setting the sharpness toward [Unsharpen].
* Patterns that are created by irregular distribution of halftone dots.
1
Display the screen.
1 Referring to Using Various Functions on page 3-29, display the screen.
2 Press [Functions] and then [Sharpness].
GB0001_01
1
GB0002_01
2
Use [
Adjust the sharpness.
GB0060_00
2
] or [
Press [-3] to [3] (Unsharpen - Sharpen) to adjust the sharpness.
3-52
] to scroll up and down.
Common Operations > Using Various Functions
Background Density Adjust
Copy
Remove dark background from originals, such as newspapers. This feature is used with full
color and auto color. Background Density Adjust is disabled if Auto Color detects black and
white originals.
Off
Do not use this function.
Auto
Adjusts the density automatically based on the original.
Manual
Manually adjust the density.
1
Send
Scan to
USB
Display the screen.
1 Referring to Using Various Functions on page 3-29, display the screen.
2 Press [Functions] and then [Background Density Adj.].
GB0001_01
1
GB0002_01
2
Use [
] to scroll up and down.
Adjusts the background density.
GB0061_00
[Auto]
1
Press [1] to [5] (Lighter - Darker) to adjust the background density.
3-53
2
GB0062_00
[Manual]
GB0061_00
2
] or [
Common Operations > Using Various Functions
Prevent Bleed-through
Copy
Hide background colors and image bleed-through when scanning thin original.
1
Send
Scan to
USB
Display the screen.
1 Referring to Using Various Functions on page 3-29, display the screen.
2 Press [Functions] and then [Prevent Bleed-through].
GB0001_01
1
GB0002_02
2
Use [
Select the function.
GB0835_00
2
3-54
] or [
] to scroll up and down.
Common Operations > Using Various Functions
Zoom
Send
Reduce or enlarge original to send or store size.
100%
Reproduces the original size.
Auto
Adjust the image to match the send or store size.
Scan to
USB
NOTE
Original Size (page 3-31), Sending Size (page 6-37), Storing Size (page 7-14), and Zoom are related to each other.
Refer to Sending Size on page 6-37 and Storing Size on page 7-14.
1
Display the screen.
1 Referring to Using Various Functions on page 3-29, display the screen.
2
GB0055_00
GB0081_03
2
1
Use [
Press [Functions] and then [Zoom].
Select the function.
GB0087_00
2
3-55
] or [
] to scroll up and down.
Common Operations > Using Various Functions
File Format
Send
Specify the image file format. In addition, you can adjust the image quality level.
PDF
Saves a PDF file. You can specify the format that comply with PDF/A.
TIFF
Saves a TIFF file.
JPEG
Saves a JPEG file. Each page will be saved individually.
XPS
Save a file in XPS.
Others
Select from PDF, TIFF, JPEG, and XPS.
Image Quality
Set the image quality from [1 Low Quality] to [5 High Quality].
PDF/A*
Set PDF/A from [PDF/A-1a] and [PDF/A-1b].
This setting is displayed only when [PDF] has been selected as the file format.
Display the screen.
1 Referring to Using Various Functions on page 3-29, display the screen.
2
Send
1
GB0081_00
2
GB0055_00
1
Use [
Scan to USB
GB0096_00
*
File Format
Scan to
USB
3-56
] or [
] to scroll up and down.
Common Operations > Using Various Functions
Select the file format.
GB0082_00
[PDF], [TIFF], [JPEG], or [XPS]
[Others]
GB0082_00
1
2 Select the file format.
GB0698_00
GB0145_00
2
1
1
GB0698_00
2
GB0083_00
3 Set the image quality.
1
3-57
2
GB0699_00
4 Set PDF/A.
GB0698_00
2
Common Operations > Using Various Functions
Color Selection
Send
Select the color mode setting.
Scan to
USB
Auto (Color/Gray)
Automatically detects whether the document is color or black and white, and scan color documents in
Full Color and black and white documents in Grayscale.
Auto (Color/B & W)
Automatically recognize whether the document is color or black and white, and scan color documents
in Full Color and black and white documents in Black and White.
Full Color
Scan document in full color.
Grayscale
Scan document in grayscale for smoother and finer finish.
Black & White
Scan document in black and white.File size is smaller than Full Color or Grayscale.
1
Display the screen.
1 Referring to Using Various Functions on page 3-29, display the screen.
2 Press [Functions] and then [Color Selection].
GB0055_00
1
GB0081_02
2
Use [
Select the color mode.
GB0022_00
2
3-58
] or [
] to scroll up and down.
Common Operations > Using Various Functions
Job Finish Notice
Copy
Send
Send e-mail notice when a job is complete.
Scan to
USB
Print from
USB
User can be notified of the completion of a copy job while working at a remote desk, saving the time spent waiting beside
the machine for copying to finish.
NOTE
PC should be configured in advance so that E-mail can be used.
Email can be sent to a single destination.
1
Display the screen.
1 Referring to Using Various Functions on page 3-29, display the screen.
2 Press [Functions] and then [Job Finish Notice].
GB0001_01
1
GB0002_03
1
Use [
Select the function.
3
Select the destination.
] to scroll up and down.
GB0063_00
2
] or [
Select an e-mail address from the address book.
2
Searches by destination name.
GB0398_00
GB0064_00
1
Allows you to search for and sort
destinations.
Displays details for individual destinations.
3-59
Common Operations > Using Various Functions
GB0064_00
Select the e-mail address from an external address book.
For details on the External Address Book, refer to KYOCERA COMMAND CENTER Operation
Guide.
Enter the e-mail address directly.
2
Up to 128 characters can be entered.
Refer to Character Entry Method on page 11-7 for details on entering characters.
GB0064_00
Uses the e-mail address of the logged in user.
This setting is displayed when using user login administration.
3-60
GB0057_05
GB0064_00
1
Common Operations > Using Various Functions
File Name Entry
Copy
Add a file name. Additional information such as Job No. and Date and Time can also be set. You
can check a job history or job status using the job name, date and time, or job number specified
here.
1
Send
Scan to
USB
Display the screen.
1 Referring to Using Various Functions on page 3-29, display the screen.
2
Copy/Send
GB0001_01
GB0002_03
2
1
Use [
] or [
] to scroll up and down.
GB0096_00
Scan to USB
2
Enter the name.
GB0057_06
1
2
Up to 32 characters can be entered.
Refer to Character Entry Method on page 11-7 for details on entering characters.
Add other information.
Use [
GB0068_00
3
3-61
] or [
] to scroll up and down.
Common Operations > Using Various Functions
Priority Override
Copy
Suspend the current job and give a new job top priority. The suspended job resumes after the other job
is finished.
Print from
USB
NOTE
This function is not available if current job was an override.
Priority override may not be available depending on the status of the current print job and memory usage.
1
Display the screen.
1 Referring to Using Various Functions on page 3-29, display the screen.
2 Press [Functions] and then [Priority Override].
GB0001_01
1
GB0002_03
2
Use [
Select the function.
GB0069_00
2
3-62
] or [
] to scroll up and down.
4
Copying
This chapter explains the following topics:
Basic Operation ................................................................................................................................................. 4-2
Copying Functions ............................................................................................................................................. 4-4
Zoom ........................................................................................................................................................ 4-5
Duplex ...................................................................................................................................................... 4-8
Combine ................................................................................................................................................ 4-12
EcoPrint ................................................................................................................................................. 4-15
Auto Image Rotation .............................................................................................................................. 4-16
Interrupt Copy .................................................................................................................................................. 4-17
4-1
Copying > Basic Operation
Basic Operation
1
Press the Copy key
NOTE
If the touch panel is turned off, press the Energy Saver key or the
Power key and wait for the machine to warm up.
2
Place the originals
For details, refer to Loading Originals on page 3-7.
3
Selecting the functions
Select the copier’s functions to use.
GB0001_01
Press [Functions] to display other functions.
Refer to Copying Functions on page 4-4.
4
Entering the copy quantity
NOTE
Press the Clear key to change the copy quantity.
4-2
Copying > Basic Operation
5
Start copying
Press the Start key to start copying.
4-3
Copying > Copying Functions
Copying Functions
Copy screen shows the commonly used functions. By pressing [Functions], other selectable functions will be shown as
a list. Use [ ] or [ ] to select the function.
What do you want to do?
Reference Page
Specify the paper size and type.
Paper Selection  page 3-40
Reduce or enlarge the original.
Zoom  page 4-5
Adjust the density.
Density  page 3-49
Copy on both sides of the paper.
Duplex  page 4-8
Combine 2 or 4 originals into 1 sheet.
Combine  page 4-12
Collate the output documents in page order.
Collate/Offset  page 3-42
Offset the output documents by set.
Specify the original size.
Original Size  page 3-31
Specify the original orientation to scan in the correct direction.
Original Orientation  page 3-33
Copy mixed size originals.
Mixed Size Originals  page 3-34
Change the paper output.
Paper Output  page 3-41
Staple in the output documents.
Staple  page 3-47
Select original image type for best results.
Original Image  page 3-51
Save toner when printing.
EcoPrint  page 4-15
Emphasize the outline of texts or lines.
Sharpness  page 3-52
Blur the image outline.
Darken or lighten the background (i.e., the area with no text or images) of originals.
Background Density Adjust 
page 3-53
Prevent bleed-through for 2-sided originals.
Prevent Bleed-through  page 3-54
Add margins (white space).
Margin  page 3-44
Scan a large number of originals separately and then produce as one job.
Continuous Scan  page 3-38
Automatically rotate the scanned image to match the paper orientation.
Auto Image Rotation  page 4-16
Send notice by e-mail when a job is complete.
Job Finish Notice  page 3-59
Add a file name to the job to easily check its status.
File Name Entry  page 3-61
Suspend the current job and override it to give a new job top priority.
Priority Override  page 3-62
Pause the current jobs and make copies immediately.
Interrupt Copy  page 4-17
4-4
Copying > Copying Functions
Zoom
Adjust the zoom to reduce or enlarge the image.
Auto
A3: 141%
A4
A5: 70%
Adjusts the image to match the paper size.
Standard Zoom
Adjusts the image to match present sizes.
Model
Inch Models
Zoom Level (Original
Copy)
Auto
Model
Metric Models
Zoom Level (Original
Copy)
Auto
400% (Max.)
400% (Max.)
200% (STMT >>Ledger)
200% (A5 >> A3)
154%(STMT >> Legal)
141% (A4 >> A3, A5 >> A4)
129% (Letter >> Ledger)
127% (Folio >> A3)
121% (Legal >> Ledger)
106% (11×15" >> A3)
100%
100%
78% (Legal >> Letter)
90% (Folio >> A4)
77% (Ledger >> Legal)
75% (11×15" >> A4)
64% (Ledger >> Letter)
70% (A3 >> A4, A4 >> A5)
50% (Ledger >> STMT)
50%
25% (Min.)
25% (Min.)
Metric Models
(Asia Pacific)
Auto
400% (Max.)
200% (A5 >> A3)
141% (A4 >> A3, B5 >> B4)
122% (A4 >> B4, A5 >> B5)
115% (B4 >> A3, B5 >> A4)
100%
86% (A3 >> B4, A4 >> B5)
81% (B4 >> A4, B5 >> A5)
70% (A3 >> A4, B4 >> B5)
50%
25% (Min.)
4-5
Copying > Copying Functions
Zoom Entry
Specify the image size in 1% increment between 25% - 400% of the original.
1
Display the screen.
1 Referring to Basic Operation on page 4-2, display the screen.
GB0001_01
2
Select the function.
GB0005_00
[Auto]
[Standard Zoom]
2
GB0006_00
1
GB0005_00
2
Use [
Select the zoom level.
4-6
] or [
] to scroll up and down.
Copying > Copying Functions
[Zoom Entry]
Enter the magnification.
4-7
3
2
GB0007_00
GB0005_00
1
Copying > Copying Functions
Duplex
Print 1-sided or open book originals to 2-sided, or 2-sided or open book originals to 1-sided. Select the original binding
orientation and desired binding orientation.
1-sided>>1-sided
Prints 1-sided to 1-sided.
1-sided>>2-sided
Prints 1-sided to 2-sided.
2-sided>>1-sided*
Prints 2-sided to 1-sided.
2-sided>>2-sided*
Prints 2-sided to 2-sided.
Others
Duplex
1-sided>>1-sided
Prints 1-sided to 1-sided.
1-sided>>2-sided
Prints 1-sided to 2-sided.
2-sided>>1-sided*
Prints 2-sided to 1-sided.
2-sided>>2-sided*
Prints 2-sided to 2-sided.
Book>>1-sided
Prints open book originals to 1-sided.
Book>>2-sided
Prints open book originals to 2-sided.
Binding in Original
If you choose a 2-sided sheet original, select the binding
edge of the originals.
Binding in Finishing
If you choose a 2-sided copy, select the binding edge of the
finished copies.
If you choose a 2-sided copy of a book, select the setting
for duplex.
Original Orientation**
*
**
Select the orientation of the original document top edge to
scan correct direction.
Requires the document processor.
This item is not displayed when [1-sided>>1-sided], [Book>>1-sided] or [Book>>2-sided] is selected.
4-8
Copying > Copying Functions
NOTE
The paper sizes supported in Two-sided to Two-sided are Ledger, Letter-R, Letter, Legal, Executive, Statement-R,
Oficio II, A3, A4-R, A4, A5-R, B4, B5-R, B5, Folio and 216 × 340 mm.
The following sizes of originals and paper are supported in Book to Two-sided mode. Original: Ledger, Letter-R,
Statement-R, A3, A4-R, A5-R, B4, B5-R and 8K. Paper: Letter, A4 and B5.
The following sizes of originals and paper are supported in Two-sided to One-sided and Book to One-sided. Original:
Ledger, Letter-R, Statement-R, A3, A4-R, A5-R, B4, B5-R and 8K. Paper: Letter, A4, B5 and 16K. You may change
paper size and reduce or enlarge copy to match that size.
1
Display the screen.
1 Referring to Basic Operation on page 4-2, display the screen.
GB0001_01
2
Select the function.
GB0009_00
[1-sided>>1-sided], [1-sided>>2-sided], [2-sided>>1-sided], or [2-sided>>2-sided]
[Others]
1
GB0009_00
2
4-9
Copying > Copying Functions
2 Select the desired Duplex option.
GB0010_00
1
GB0024_00
2
Use [
] or [
] to scroll up and down.
If you choose a 2-sided sheet or book, proceed to Step 3. If you choose duplex, proceed to
Step 4. If you choose [Book >> 2-sided], proceed to Step 5.
3 Select the binding edge of the originals.
1
GB0181_00
GB0010_01
2
4 Select the binding edge of the finished copies.
1
GB0012_00
GB0010_01
2
5 Select the binding edge of the finished copies.
GB0010_02
1
4-10
GB0012_01
2
Copying > Copying Functions
6 Select the original orientation.
1
4-11
GB0015_03
GB0010_01
2
Copying > Copying Functions
Combine
Combine 2 or 4 original sheets into 1 copied page. You can select the page layout or the type of boundary lines around
the pages.
2 in 1
Copies 2 originals onto each page.
4 in 1
Copies 4 originals onto each page.
Other
Settings
Combine
2 in 1 (L to R/T to B)
Copies 2 originals onto each page.
2 in 1 (R to L/B to T)
4 in 1 (Right then Down)
Copies 4 originals onto each page.
4 in 1 (Left then Down)
4 in 1 (Down then Right)
4 in 1 (Down then Left)
Border Line
Sets the boundary line type to a solid line, dotted line, or
positioning mark.
Original Orientation
Select the orientation of the original document top edge to
scan correct direction.
NOTE
Combine mode is available for the copy paper sizes of A3, A4-R, A4, A5-R, B4, B5-R, B5, Folio, 216 × 340 mm,
Ledger, Letter-R, Letter, Legal, Statement-R, Oficio II, 8K, 16K-R and 16K.
When placing the original on the platen, be sure to copy the originals in page order.
4-12
Copying > Copying Functions
1
Display the screen.
1 Referring to Basic Operation on page 4-2, display the screen.
GB0001_01
2
Select the function.
GB0016_00
[2 in 1] or [4 in 1]
[Others]
GB0016_00
1
2 Select the desired Combine option.
2
GB0018_00
1
GB0017_00
2
Use [
4-13
] or [
] to scroll up and down.
Copying > Copying Functions
3 Sets the boundary line type.
1
GB0019_00
GB0017_01
2
4 Select the original orientation.
1
4-14
GB0015_04
GB0017_01
2
Copying > Copying Functions
EcoPrint
Use EcoPrint to save toner when printing. Use this function for test copies or any other occasion when high quality print
is not required.
1
Display the screen.
1 Referring to Basic Operation on page 4-2, display the screen.
2
GB0001_01
GB0002_01
2
1
Use [
Select the function.
GB0045_00
2
4-15
] or [
] to scroll up and down.
Copying > Copying Functions
Auto Image Rotation
When original and paper source size are the same, but their orientation is different, rotate image 90 degrees.
1
Display the screen.
1 Referring to Basic Operation on page 4-2, display the screen.
2
GB0001_01
1
GB0002_02
2
Use [
Select the function.
GB0044_00
2
4-16
] or [
] to scroll up and down.
Copying > Interrupt Copy
Interrupt Copy
This function allows you to pause the current jobs in progress when you need to make copies immediately. When
interruption copy ends, the machine resumes the paused print jobs.
NOTE
If the machine is left unused for 60 seconds in interrupt copy mode, interrupt copying is automatically cancelled and
printing resumes. You can change the delay until interrupt copying is cancelled. Change the delay as required. For
more information, refer to Interrupt Clear Timer on page 9-22.
The interrupt copy function may be unavailable due to insufficient memory depending on the manner in which the
equipment is being utilized.
Press the Interrupt key.
GB0001_99
1
The current print job is temporarily interrupted.
2
Make an interrupt copy.
1 Place the originals onto the machine for interrupt copy, and configure the copy settings.
2 Press the Start key to start interrupt copying.
3
End the interrupt copy.
When interrupt copying ends, press the Interrupt key. The machine resumes the paused print
jobs.
4-17
Copying > Interrupt Copy
4-18
5
Printing
This chapter explains the following topics:
Printing from Applications ..................................................................................................................................
Using a Job Box .................................................................................................................................................
Private Print .............................................................................................................................................
Proof and Hold Print Box .........................................................................................................................
Automatic Delete Setting for Temporary Documents ...............................................................................
5-1
5-2
5-4
5-4
5-6
5-9
Printing > Printing from Applications
Printing from Applications
Follow the steps below to print documents from applications.
NOTE
To print the document from applications, install the printer driver on your computer from the supplied CD-ROM
(Product Library).
1
Display the window.
1 Create a document using an application.
2 Click File and select Print in the application. The Print dialog box appears.
2
Configure the printer.
1
3
2
1 Select this machine from the list.
2 Enter the desired print quantity in the Number of copies box. Enter any number up to 999.
When there is more than one document, select Collate to print out one by one in the
sequence of the page numbers.
3 Click Preferences button.
5-2
Printing > Printing from Applications
4
6
5
7
8
4 Select the Basic tab.
5 Click Page Sizes button to select the paper size.
To print on the special paper such as thick paper, click the Media Type menu and select the
media type.
6 Click Source and select the paper source.
NOTE
If you choose Auto Select, papers are supplied automatically from the paper source loaded
with paper of optimum size and type.
To print on special paper such as envelope or thick paper, place it on the multi purpose tray
and select MP Tray.
7 Select paper orientation, either Portrait or Landscape, to match the orientation of the
document. Selecting Rotate will print the document rotated 180°.
8 Click OK button to return to the Print dialog box.
9 Click OK button to start printing.
Printer Driver Help
The printer driver includes Help. To learn about print settings, open the printer driver print settings screen and display
Help as explained below.
•
Click the ? button in the upper right corner of the screen and then click the item you want to
know about.
•
Click the item you want to know about and press the [F1] key on your keyboard.
5-3
Printing > Using a Job Box
Using a Job Box
The Job Box stores print data in the machine's RAM disk for later printing from the operation panel as needed.
Private Print
Private Print stores the print data which is printed by using the printer driver as a Private Print.
Refer to the Printer Driver Operation Guide on how to print a job as Private Print using the printer driver.
NOTE
RAM disk mode must be enabled. RAM disk mode can be used when optional memory has been installed.
For details, refer to RAM Disk Setting on page 9-21.
1
Display the screen.
3
GB0650_00
1
GB0051_00
2
Select the creator of the document to print.
3
Select the document.
GB0653_01
GB0651_00
2
Displays details for individual documents.
5-4
Printing > Using a Job Box
Print and delete the document.
To print the document
2
3
GB0003_00
GB0653_01
1
Specify the number of copies to print as desired. When using the number of copies specified
with print job, select “---”.
Upon completion of printing, the Private Print job is automatically deleted.
To delete
GB0653_01
4
Select the document you wish to delete and press [(Delete)] (the trash can icon).
NOTE
The password entry screen will be displayed. Enter the password using the numeric keys.
5-5
Printing > Using a Job Box
Proof and Hold Print Box
Proof and Hold box stores the print data which is printed by using the printer driver as a Proof and Hold Print job.
Refer to the Printer Driver Operation Guide on how to print a job as Proof and Hold Print job using the printer driver.
NOTE
RAM disk mode must be enabled. RAM disk mode can be used when optional memory has been installed.
For details, refer to RAM Disk Setting on page 9-21.
Setting the Number of Stored Jobs
To maintain free space on the 5$0 'isk, you can set the maximum number of stored jobs.
1
Display the screen.
2
3
GB0290_00
GB0054_02
1
GB0310_00
4
Enter the maximum number of stored jobs.
1
2
GB0311_00
2
You can enter any number between 0 and 50.
NOTE
If you enter a value of 0 (zero), you cannot use the Proof and Hold function.
5-6
Printing > Using a Job Box
Printing and Deleting the Document
You can print and delete documents stored in the Proof and Hold box.
1
Display the screen.
1
GB0051_00
2
GB0650_00
3
Select the creator of the document.
3
Select the document.
GB0654_00
GB0652_00
2
Displays details for individual documents.
Print and delete the document.
To print the document
2
3
GB0003_00
1
GB0654_00
4
Specify the number of copies to print as desired. When using the number of copies specified
with print job, select “---”.
5-7
Printing > Using a Job Box
To delete
1
GB0654_00
2
Select the document you wish to delete and press [(Delete)] (the trash can icon).
5-8
Printing > Using a Job Box
Automatic Delete Setting for Temporary Documents
This setting specifies that documents, such as Private Printing, or Proof and Hold Printing, saved temporarily in the job
box are automatically deleted after they have been saved for a set time.
Off
Temporary documents are not automatically deleted. However, the temporary documents will be
deleted when the power is turned off.
1 hour
Documents are deleted after 1 hour.
4 hours
Documents are deleted after 4 hours.
1 day
Documents are deleted after 1 day.
1 week
Documents are deleted after 1 week.
NOTE
This function is valid for documents saved after the function is set.
Regardless of this function setting, temporary documents are deleted when the main power switch is turned off.
1
Display the screen.
2
3
GB0290_00
GB0054_02
1
GB0310_00
4
Select the time.
1
Use [
GB0312_00
2
2
5-9
] or [
] to scroll up and down.
Printing > Using a Job Box
5-10
6
Sending
This chapter explains the following topics:
Basic Operation ................................................................................................................................................. 6-2
Preparation for Sending a Document to a PC .................................................................................................... 6-5
Checking What to Enter for [Host Name] ................................................................................................. 6-5
Checking What to Enter for [Login User Name] ....................................................................................... 6-6
Creating a Shared Folder ........................................................................................................................ 6-7
Checking the [Path] ............................................................................................................................... 6-10
Configuring Windows Firewall (for Windows 7) ...................................................................................... 6-11
Specifying Destination ...................................................................................................................................... 6-15
Choosing from the Address Book .......................................................................................................... 6-15
Choosing by One Touch Key ................................................................................................................. 6-17
Entering a New E-mail Address ............................................................................................................. 6-18
Specifying a New PC Folder .................................................................................................................. 6-19
Checking and Editing Destinations ........................................................................................................ 6-22
Sending to Different Types of Destinations (Multi Sending) ................................................................... 6-23
Registering Destinations in the Address Book ................................................................................................. 6-24
Adding a Contact ................................................................................................................................... 6-24
Adding a Group ...................................................................................................................................... 6-28
Editing and Deleting Address Book Entries ........................................................................................... 6-31
Adding a Destination on One Touch Key ......................................................................................................... 6-33
Adding a Destination .............................................................................................................................. 6-33
Editing and Deleting One Touch Key ..................................................................................................... 6-35
Sending Functions ........................................................................................................................................... 6-36
Sending Size .......................................................................................................................................... 6-37
File Separation ....................................................................................................................................... 6-39
E-mail Subject/Body .............................................................................................................................. 6-40
FTP Encrypted TX ................................................................................................................................. 6-41
WSD Scan ....................................................................................................................................................... 6-42
Scanning using TWAIN .................................................................................................................................... 6-45
6-1
Sending > Basic Operation
Basic Operation
This machine can send a scanned image as an attachment to an E-mail message or to a PC linked to the network. In
order to do this, it is necessary to register the sender and destination (recipient) address on the network.
A network environment which enables the machine to connect to a mail server is required in order to send e-mail. It is
recommended that a Local Area Network (LAN) be used to assist with transmission speed and security issues.
At the same time as you send a scanned image, you can also print the image or send it to the Document Box.
To use the transmission function, verify the following:
•
Program the settings, including the E-mail setting on the machine.
•
Use COMMAND CENTER (the internal HTML web page) to register the IP address, the host name of the SMTP
server, and the recipient.
•
Register the destination in the Address Book or One Touch keys.
•
Create a share folder in the destination computer, when a folder (SMB/FTP) is selected as the destination.
Consult your network administrator concerning destination folder sharing settings.
Basic Sending
Send as E-mail
Sends a scanned original image as an E-mail attachment. (page 6-18)
Send to Folder (SMB)
Stores a scanned original image in a shared folder of any PC. (page 6-19)
Send to Folder (FTP)
Stores a scanned original image in a folder of an FTP server. (page 6-19)
Image Data Scanning with TWAIN/WIA
Scan the document using a TWAIN or WIA compatible application program.
NOTE
Different sending options can be specified in combination. Refer to Sending to Different Types of Destinations (Multi
Sending) on page 6-23.
The fax function can be used when the optional fax kit has been installed. For details about this function, refer to the
FAX Operation Guide.
6-2
Sending > Basic Operation
1
Press the Send key
NOTE
If the touch panel is turned off, press the Energy Saver key or the
Power key and wait for the machine to warm up.
2
Place the originals
For details, refer to Loading Originals on page 3-7.
3
Specifying destination
Select the destination to which to send an image.
GB0055_00
For details, refer to Specifying Destination on page 6-15.
4
Selecting the functions
Select the sending functions to use.
Press [Functions] to display other functions.
GB0055_00
For details, refer to Sending Functions on page 6-36.
6-3
Sending > Basic Operation
5
Start sending
Press the Start key to start sending.
6-4
Sending > Preparation for Sending a Document to a PC
Preparation for Sending a Document to a PC
Check the information that needs to be set on the machine and create a folder to receive the document on your
computer. Screens of Windows 7 are used in the following explanation. The details of the screens will vary in other
versions of Windows.
NOTE
Log on to Windows with administrator privileges.
Checking What to Enter for [Host Name]
Check the name of the destination computer.
1
Display the window.
From the Start menu, select Computer and then System Properties.
In Windows XP, right-click My Computer and select Properties. The System Properties
dialog box appears. Click the Computer Name tab in the window that appears.
2
Check the computer name.
Check the computer name in the window that appears.
If there is a workgroup
All characters appearing in "Full computer name" should be entered in [Host Name].
(Example: PC001)
If there is a domain
The characters to the left of the first dot (.) in "Full computer name" should be entered in [Host
Name]. (Example: pc001)
After checking the computer name, click the
Properties screen.
(Close) button to close the System
In Windows XP, after checking the computer name, click the Cancel button to close the
System Properties screen.
6-5
Sending > Preparation for Sending a Document to a PC
Checking What to Enter for [Login User Name]
Check the domain name and user name for logging onto Windows.
1
Display the window.
From the Start menu, select All Programs (or Programs), Accessories and then Command
Prompt.
The Command Prompt window appears.
2
Check the domain name and user name.
At the Command Prompt, enter "net config workstation" and then press [Enter].
Screen example: user name "james.smith" and domain name "ABCDNET"
6-6
Sending > Preparation for Sending a Document to a PC
Creating a Shared Folder
Create a shared folder to receive the document in the destination computer.
NOTE
If there is a workgroup in System Properties, configure the settings below to limit folder access to a specific user or
group.
1 From the Start menu, select Control Panel, Appearance and Personalization, and
then Folder Options.
Windows XP, click My Computer and select Folder Options in Tools.
2
1
2
3
Remove the checkmark from Use Sharing Wizard (Recommended) in Advanced
settings.
In Windows XP, click the View tab and remove the checkmark from Use Simple File
Sharing (Recommended) in Advanced settings.
1
Create a folder.
1 Create a folder on the local disk (C).
For example, create a folder with the name "scannerdata" on the local disk (C).
2 Right-click the scannerdata folder and click Share and Advanced sharing. Click the
Advanced Sharing button.
In Windows XP, right-click the scannerdata folder and select Sharing and Security... (or
Sharing).
6-7
Sending > Preparation for Sending a Document to a PC
2
Configures permission settings.
1
1
2
In Windows XP, select Share this folder and click the Permissions button.
2
3
1
2
3
Enter the user name in the text box.
Click the [Location] button and select the desired location. To select the search target, click a
location to select it. When you are a member of a domain, your current domain will be set as
the search target by default.
6-8
Sending > Preparation for Sending a Document to a PC
4
1
2
3
Select the entered user, select the Change and Read permissions.
In Windows XP, go to step 6.
NOTE
"Everyone" gives sharing permission to everyone on the network. To strengthen security, it
is recommended that you select Everyone and remove the Read permission checkmark.
5 Click the OK button in the Advanced Sharing screen to close the screen.
6
1
2
In Windows XP, click the Security tab and then click the Add button.
7 Proceed in the same way as in step 3 to add a user to Group or user names.
8
1
2
3
Select the added user, select the Modify and Read & execute permissions.
6-9
Sending > Preparation for Sending a Document to a PC
Checking the [Path]
Check the share name of the shared folder that will be the destination for the document.
1
Display the window.
1 Enter "\\pc001" in "Program and File Search" in the Start menu.
In Windows XP, click Search in the Start menu, select All files and folders, and search for
the destination computer to which the file will be sent.
In Search Companion, click Computers or people and then A computer on the network.
In the "Computer name:" text box, enter the name of the computer that you checked (pc001)
and then click Search.
2 Click "\\pc001\scannerdata" that appears in the search results.
In Windows XP, double-click the computer ("pc001") that appears in the search results.
2
Check the folder that appears.
1 Check the address bar. The third and following text strings () should be entered for the
path.
In Windows XP, double-click the scannerdata folder and check the address bar. The text string
to the right of the third backslash (\) should be entered in Path.
(Example: scannerdata)
NOTE
You can also specify a subfolder in the shared folder as the location where data is to be
sent. In this case, "share name\name of folder in the shared folder" should be entered for
the Path. In the example window above, "scannerdata\projectA" is the Path.
6-10
Sending > Preparation for Sending a Document to a PC
Configuring Windows Firewall (for Windows 7)
Permit sharing of files and printers and set the port used for SMB transmission.
NOTE
Log on to Windows with administrator privileges.
1
Check file and printer sharing.
1 From the Start menu, select Control Panel, System and Security, and Allow a program
through Windows Firewall.
NOTE
If the User Account Control dialog box appears, click the Continue button.
2
1
2
3
Select the File and Printer Sharing checkbox.
2
Add a port.
1 From the Start menu, select Control Panel, System and Security, and Check firewall
status.
6-11
Sending > Preparation for Sending a Document to a PC
2
3
4
5
1
2
Pat
er
s
s
t
r
aat106108
2300T
ur
nhout
T
el
:
014/
42.
55.
99
i
nf
o@v
anmec
hel
en.
be
www.
v
anmec
hel
en.
be
F
ax
:
014/
42.
32.
64
6-12
Sending > Preparation for Sending a Document to a PC
6
1
2
3
Select Specific local ports, and enter "139".
7
1
2
8
1
2
Make sure all checkboxes are selected.
6-13
Sending > Preparation for Sending a Document to a PC
9
1
2
Enter "Scan to SMB" in "Name" and click Finish.
In Windows XP or Windows Vista
1 From the Start menu, select Control Panel, System and Security (or Security Center),
and then Check Firewall Status) (or Windows Firewall).
If the User Account Control dialog box appears, click the Continue button.
2 Click the Exceptions tab and then the Add port... button.
3 Specify Add a Port settings.
Enter any name in "Name" (example: Scan to SMB). This will be the name of the new port.
Enter "139" in "Port Number". Select TCP for "Protocol".
4 Click the OK button to close the Add a Port dialog box.
6-14
Sending > Specifying Destination
Specifying Destination
Select the destination to which to send an image.
Select the destination using either of the following methods.
•
Choosing from the Address Book (page 6-15)
•
Choosing by One Touch Key (page 6-17)
•
Entering a New E-mail Address (page 6-18)
•
Specifying a New PC Folder (page 6-19)
NOTE
When the optional fax kit has been installed, you can specify the fax destination. Enter the other party’s number using
the numeric keypad.
Choosing from the Address Book
Select a destination registered in the Address Book.
NOTE
For more information about how to register destinations in the Address Book, refer to Registering Destinations in the
Address Book on page 6-24.
For details on the External Address Book, refer to KYOCERA COMMAND CENTER Operation Guide.
1
Display the screen.
1 Referring to Basic Operation on page 6-2, display the screen.
GB0055_00
2
Select the destination.
Use [
] or [
] to scroll up and down.
GB0426_00
2
Press the checkbox to select the desired destination from the list. The selected destinations
are indicated by a checkmark in the check box.
6-15
Sending > Specifying Destination
Destination Search
Searches by destination name.
GB0426_00
Advanced search by type of registered destination (Email, Folder (SMB/FTP), FAX or Group).
Displays details for individual destinations.
You can specify a destination by address number by pressing the Quick No. Search key.
GB0396_00
GB0426_00
You can also press [Menu] to perform a more detailed search.
Use [
] or [
] to scroll up and down.
Narrow Down: Advanced search by type of registered destination (E-mail, Folder (SMB/FTP),
FAX or Group).
Search (Name) and Search (No.): Searches by destination name or address number.
Sort (Name) and Sort (No.): Sorts the list by destination name or address number.
NOTE
You may choose multiple destinations.
To cancel a selection, press the corresponding checkbox to clear the check mark.
Accept the destinations.
GB0426_00
3
Destinations can be changed later. Refer to Checking and Editing Destinations on page 6-22.
6-16
Sending > Specifying Destination
Choosing by One Touch Key
Select the destination using the One Touch Keys.
NOTE
For more information on adding One Touch keys, refer to Adding a Destination on One Touch Key on page 6-33.
1
Display the screen.
1 Referring to Basic Operation on page 6-2, display the screen.
GB0055_00
2
2
Select the destination.
] or [
] to scroll up and down.
GB0095_00
Use [
Press the One Touch Keys where the destination is registered. Multiple One Touch Keys can
be selected.
You can specify a one-touch key by one-touch number by pressing the Quick No. Search key.
Accept the destination.
GB0095_00
3
Destinations can be changed later. Refer to Checking and Editing Destinations on page 6-22.
6-17
Sending > Specifying Destination
Entering a New E-mail Address
Enter the desired e-mail address.
NOTE
Access the COMMAND CENTER beforehand and specify the settings required for sending e-mail. For details, refer to
COMMAND CENTER (Settings for E-mail) on page 2-23.
1
Display the screen.
1 Referring to Basic Operation on page 6-2, display the screen.
GB0055_00
2
Enter destination E-mail address.
GB0057_07
2
Up to 128 characters can be entered.
Refer to Character Entry Method on page 11-7 for details on entering characters.
To enter multiple destinations, press [Next Destination] and enter the next destination. Up to
100 E-mail addresses can be specified.
You can register the entered email address in the Address Book by pressing [Menu] and then
[Add Address Book]. You can also replace the information for a previously registered
destination.
Accept the destinations.
GB0057_07
3
Destinations can be changed later. Refer to Checking and Editing Destinations on page 6-22.
6-18
Sending > Specifying Destination
Specifying a New PC Folder
Specify either the desired shared folder on a computer or an FTP server as the destination.
NOTE
Refer to Creating a Shared Folder on page 6-7 for details on how to share a folder.
Be sure that SMB Protocol or FTP in the COMMAND CENTER is On. For details, refer to the KYOCERA COMMAND
CENTER Operation Guide.
1
Display the screen.
1 Referring to Basic Operation on page 6-2, display the screen.
GB0055_00
2
Select the folder type.
3
Enter the destination information.
GB0103_00
2
GB0057_08
1
2
Enter the next information. Once you have entered one item, press [Next] to advance to the
next item.
For send to folder (SMB)
Item
Data to be entered
Max. characters
Host Name
Host name or IP address of the PC to receive
the data.
Up to 64 characters
Path
Path to the receiving folder such as follows.
Up to 128 characters
For example, \User\ScanData.
6-19
Sending > Specifying Destination
Item
Login User Name
Data to be entered
Max. characters
Up to 64 characters
User name to access the PC
Domain name/User name
For example, abcdnet\james.smith.
User name@Domain name
For example, james.smith@abcdnet
Login Password
Password to access the PC
Up to 64 characters
For send to folder (FTP)
Item
Data to be entered
Max. characters
Host Name
Host name or IP address of FTP server
Up to 64 characters
Path
Path to the receiving folder.
Up to 128 characters
For example, \User\ScanData.
Otherwise the data will be saved in the home
directory.
Login User Name
FTP server login user name
Up to 64 characters
Login Password
FTP server login password
Up to 64 characters
Refer to Character Entry Method on page 11-7 for details on entering characters.
Confirm the information.
Check the information. Change the information as needed by pressing the item in question.
] or [
] to scroll up and down.
GB0128_00
Use [
When specifying a computer or server port number as the destination, press [Port] and enter
the port number. You can enter a number from 1 to 65,535 with a maximum of 5 digits.
Confirm the connection status.
1
GB0020_00
2
GB0128_00
4
Connected. appears when connection to the destination is correctly established. If Cannot
connect. appears, review the entry.
To enter multiple destinations, press [Next Destination] and enter the next destination. You can
specify a combined total of up to 5 FTP and SMB destination folders.
You can register the entered information in the Address Book by pressing [Menu] and then
[Add Address Book].
6-20
Sending > Specifying Destination
Accept the destinations.
GB0128_00
5
Destinations can be changed later. Refer to Checking and Editing Destinations on page 6-22.
6-21
Sending > Specifying Destination
Checking and Editing Destinations
Check and edit a selected destination.
1
Display the screen.
1 Referring to Specifying Destination on page 6-15, specify the destination.
GB0055_02
2
Check and edit the destination.
Deletes the selected destination.
Adds a new destination.
GB0105_00
2
Scrolls up and down when the list of
destinations cannot be displayed in its
entirety on a single screen.
Displays details for the destinations. New E-mail addresses and PC
folders can be edited if they have been specified.
6-22
Sending > Specifying Destination
Sending to Different Types of Destinations (Multi Sending)
You can specify destinations that combine e-mail addresses, folders (SMB or FTP) and fax numbers*. This is referred to
as Multi Sending. This is useful for sending to different types of destination (e-mail addresses, folders, etc.) in a single
operation.
* Requires the optional fax kit.
No. of broadcast items
E-mail: Up to 100
Folders (SMP, FTP): Total of 5 SMB and FTP
FAX: Up to 100
Also, depending on the settings, you can send and print at the same time.
Procedures are the same as used in specifying the destinations of respective types. Continue to enter E-mail address or
folder path so that they appear in the destination list. Press the Start key to launch transmission to all destinations at one
time.
NOTE
If the destinations include a fax, the images sent to all destinations will be black and white.
6-23
Sending > Registering Destinations in the Address Book
Registering Destinations in the Address Book
Add a new destination to the Address Book. There are two registering methods, contacts and groups. When adding a
group, enter the group name and select group members from the Address Book.
Adding a Contact
A maximum of 200 contact addresses can be registered. Each address can include the information such as destination
name, E-mail address, FTP server folder path, computer folder path, and FAX No. (optional).
NOTE
If user login administration is enabled, you can only edit destinations in the Address Book by logging in with
administrator privileges.
1
Display the screen.
Use [
] or [
] to scroll up and down.
2
GB0054_02
1
GB0411_00
3
Adds a new destination.
3
Select the registration method.
GB0419_00
GB0413_01
2
6-24
Sending > Registering Destinations in the Address Book
4
Enter the destination name.
GB0057_11
1
2
Up to 32 characters can be entered.
Refer to Character Entry Method on page 11-7 for details on entering characters.
5
Enter the address number.
GB0078_00
2
3
GB0217_00
1
Press [+], [-] or numeric keys to enter a particular Address Number (1-250).
Address Number is an ID for a destination. You can select any available number out of 200
numbers for contacts and 50 numbers for groups.
If you set “000” as the address number, the address is registered under the lowest available
number.
GB0078_01
GB0078_00
Enter the destination.
Select the type of destination to register.
For details on FAX, refer to FAX Operation Guide.
E-mail Address
1
GB0057_13
6
2
Enter the E-mail address. Up to 128 characters can be entered.
Refer to Character Entry Method on page 11-7 for details on entering characters.
6-25
Sending > Registering Destinations in the Address Book
The Folder (SMB) Address
1 Enter Host Name, Path, Login User Name and Login Password.
2
3
GB0057_15
GB0705_00
1
For more information, refer to Specifying a New PC Folder on page 6-19.
2 Confirm the connection status.
GB0705_01
1
GB0696_00
2
Connected. appears when connection to the destination is correctly established. If Cannot
connect. appears, review the entry.
The Folder (FTP) Address
1 Enter Host Name, Path, Login User Name and Login Password.
2
3
GB0057_15
GB0709_00
1
For more information, refer to Specifying a New PC Folder on page 6-19.
2 Confirm the connection status.
GB0709_01
1
Connected. appears when connection to the destination is correctly established. If Cannot
connect. appears, review the entry.
6-26
GB0696_00
2
Sending > Registering Destinations in the Address Book
Register the destination.
GB0078_00
7
6-27
Sending > Registering Destinations in the Address Book
Adding a Group
Compile two or more contacts into a group. Designations in the group can be added at the same time. When adding a
group, a maximum of 50 groups can be added in the Address Book.
Before adding a group in the Address Book, the contacts to be included in the group must be added first.
NOTE
If user login administration is enabled, you can only edit destinations in the Address Book by logging in with
administrator privileges.
1
Display the screen.
Use [
] or [
] to scroll up and down.
2
GB0054_02
1
GB0411_00
3
Adds a new destination.
3
Select the registration method.
GB0419_00
GB0413_02
2
6-28
Sending > Registering Destinations in the Address Book
4
Enter the group name.
GB0057_16
1
2
Up to 32 characters can be entered.
Refer to Character Entry Method on page 11-7 for details on entering characters.
5
Enter the address number.
GB0420_00
2
3
GB0217_00
1
Press [+], [-] or numeric keys to enter a particular Address Number (1-250).
Address Number is an ID for a destination. You can select any available number out of 200
numbers for contacts and 50 numbers for groups.
If you set “000” as the address number, the address is registered under the lowest available
number.
Select the members (destinations).
1 Display the screen.
2
GB0114_00
GB0420_00
1
2 Press the checkbox to select the desired destination from the list. The selected
destinations are indicated by a checkmark in the check box.
Searches by destination name.
Advanced search by type of registered destination (Email, Folder (SMB/FTP) or FAX).
Use [
] or [
] to scroll up and down.
GB0428_00
6
Displays details for individual destinations.
You can specify a destination by address number by pressing the Quick No. Search key.
6-29
Sending > Registering Destinations in the Address Book
GB0396_00
GB0428_00
You can also press [Menu] to perform a more detailed search.
Use [
] or [
] to scroll up and down.
Narrow Down: Advanced search by type of registered destination (E-mail, Folder (SMB/FTP)
or FAX).
Search (Name) and Search (No.): Searches by destination name or address number.
Sort (Name) and Sort (No.): Sorts the list by destination name or address number.
NOTE
To cancel a selection, press the corresponding checkbox to clear the check mark.
1
Register the group.
2
GB0420_01
8
2
1
6-30
GB0114_01
Accept the members.
GB0428_00
7
Sending > Registering Destinations in the Address Book
Editing and Deleting Address Book Entries
Edit and delete the destinations (contacts) you added to the Address Book.
1
Display the screen.
Use [
] or [
] to scroll up and down.
2
GB0054_02
1
GB0411_00
3
Edit or delete the destination.
To edit the destination
GB0413_80
2
To edit an entry, press the […] button for the destination (contacts) or group in question.
You can specify a destination by address number by pressing the Quick No. Search key.
6-31
Sending > Registering Destinations in the Address Book
To delete a member (group)
To delete a member from a group, select the destination you wish to delete and press
[(Delete)] (the trash can icon).
3
2
GB0114_01
GB0415_00
1
4
GB0114_01
GB0415_00
6
5
7
To delete
2
1
GB0413_80
3
Select the destination (contacts) or group to delete and press [(Delete)] (the trash can icon).
6-32
Sending > Adding a Destination on One Touch Key
Adding a Destination on One Touch Key
Add a new destination (contact or group) on One Touch Key.
Adding a Destination
Add a new destination (contact or group). A maximum of 100 destinations can be registered.
To register a destination to a One Touch Key, it must first be registered in the Address Book. Register one or more
destinations as needed before proceeding.
1
Display the screen.
Use [
] or [
] to scroll up and down.
2
GB0054_02
1
GB0411_00
3
2
Add a One-Touch Key.
2
GB0422_00
1
Select a One Touch Key with no registered destination, and press [+].
Select the destinations.
Searches by destination name.
Advanced search by type of registered destination (Email, Folder (SMB/FTP), FAX or Group).
Use [
] or [
] to scroll up and down.
GB0429_00
3
Displays details for individual destinations.
Select one destination (contact or group) from the Address Book.
You can specify a destination by address number by pressing the Quick No. Search key.
6-33
Sending > Adding a Destination on One Touch Key
GB0396_00
GB0429_00
You can also press [Menu] to perform a more detailed search.
Use [
] or [
] to scroll up and down.
Narrow Down: Advanced search by type of registered destination (E-mail, Folder (SMB/FTP),
FAX or Group).
Search (Name) and Search (No.): Searches by destination name or address number.
Sort (Name) and Sort (No.): Sorts the list by destination name or address number.
4
Enter the One Touch Key name.
Up to 24 characters can be entered.
Refer to Character Entry Method on page 11-7 for details on entering characters.
Register the destination.
GB0754_00
5
6-34
GB0057_18
GB0429_00
1
2
Sending > Adding a Destination on One Touch Key
Editing and Deleting One Touch Key
Edit and delete the destinations you added to One Touch Key.
1
Display the screen.
Use [
] or [
] to scroll up and down.
2
GB0054_02
1
GB0411_00
3
Edit or delete the destination.
To edit the destination
2
GB0430_00
GB0422_01
1
Select the One Touch Key you wish to edit and press [Menu] followed by [Edit].
To delete
2
1
3
GB0422_01
2
Select the One Touch Key you wish to delete and press [(Delete)] (the trash can icon).
6-35
Sending > Sending Functions
Sending Functions
Send screen shows the commonly used functions. By pressing [Functions], other selectable functions will be shown as
a list. Use [ ] or [ ] to select the function.
What do you want to do?
Reference Page
Select the file format for images being sent.
File Format  page 3-56
Specify the original size.
Original Size  page 3-31
Specify the original orientation to scan in the correct direction.
Original Orientation  page 3-33
Send mixed size originals.
Mixed Size Originals  page 3-34
Automatically scan 2-sided originals.
2-sided/Book Original  page 3-36
Change the size of the image being sent.
Sending Size  page 6-37
Send each SDJHLQ a separate ILOH.)ile Separation  page 6-39
Set the resolution at which to scan originals.
Scan Resolution  page 3-50
Adjust the density.
Density  page 3-49
Change the color mode for images being sent.
Color Selection  page 3-58
Select original image type for best results.
Original Image  page 3-51
Emphasize the outline of texts or lines.
Sharpness  page 3-52
Blur the image outline.
Darken or lighten the background (i.e., the area with no text or images) of originals.
Background Density Adjust 
page 3-53
Prevent bleed-through for 2-sided originals.
Prevent Bleed-through  page 3-54
Enlarge or shrink originals according to the sending size.
Zoom  page 3-55
Scan a large number of originals separately and then produce as one job.
Continuous Scan  page 3-38
Add a file name to the job to easily check its status.
File Name Entry  page 3-61
Add an E-mail subject and body (when sending E-mail).
E-mail Subject/Body  page 6-40
Send notice by e-mail when a job is complete.
Job Finish Notice  page 3-59
Encrypt your message.
FTP Encrypted TX  page 6-41
Send aQ LPDJH to a WSD-compatible computer.:SD Scan  page 6-42
NOTE
This section does not include fax settings. For details on fax operation, refer to the )$;2SHUDWLRQ*XLGH)D[
functionality requires the optional fax kit.
6-36
Sending > Sending Functions
Sending Size
Select size of image to be sent.
Same as Original Size
Automatically sends the same size as the original.
Metric
Select from A3, A4, A5, A5-R, B4, B5, B6, Folio or 216 × 340 mm.
inch
Select from Ledger, Letter, Legal, Statement, 11 × 15", or Oficio II.
Others
Select from 8K, 16K, Hagaki or Oufuku Hagaki,
Relationship between Original Size, Sending Size, and Zoom
Original Size (page 3-31), Sending Size, and Zoom (page 3-55) are related to each other. Refer to the following table.
Original Size and the size you wish to
send as are
the same
different
Original Size
Specify as necessary
Specify as necessary
Sending Size
Select [Same as Original]
Select the required size
Zoom
Select [100%] (or [Auto])
Select [Auto]
NOTE
When you select Sending Size that is different from Original Size, and select the Zoom [100%], you can send the
image as the actual size (No Zoom).
1
Display the screen.
1 Referring to Basic Operation on page 6-2, display the screen.
2
GB0055_00
GB0081_01
2
1
Use [
Select the sending size.
[Same as Original Size]
GB0071_00
2
6-37
] or [
] to scroll up and down.
Sending > Sending Functions
[Metric], [inch] or [Others]
2
GB0072_00
GB0071_00
1
Use [
Select the desired size.
6-38
] or [
] to scroll up and down.
Sending > Sending Functions
File Separation
Create several files by dividing scanned original data page by page, and send the files.
NOTE
Three-digit serial number such as abc_001.pdf, abc_002.pdf... is attached to the end of the file name.
1
Display the screen.
1 Referring to Basic Operation on page 6-2, display the screen.
2
GB0055_00
1
Use [
Select the function.
GB0084_00
2
6-39
] or [
] to scroll up and down.
GB0081_01
2
Sending > Sending Functions
E-mail Subject/Body
Add subject and body when sending a document.
NOTE
The subject can include up to 60 characters, and the body can include up to 500 characters.
1
Display the screen.
1 Referring to Basic Operation on page 6-2, display the screen.
2
Use [
2
] or [
GB0081_04
2
GB0055_00
1
] to scroll up and down.
Enter the subject.
2
3
GB0057_19
GB0088_00
1
Refer to Character Entry Method on page 11-7 for details on entering characters.
Enter the body.
6-40
3
GB0057_20
2
1
GB0088_01
3
Sending > Sending Functions
FTP Encrypted TX
Encrypt images when using FTP. Encryption secures the document transmission.
NOTE
To use FTP encryption, set SSL to [On] in the Secure Protocol settings. For details, refer to Secure Protocol on page
9-20.
1
Display the screen.
1 Referring to Basic Operation on page 6-2, display the screen.
2
GB0055_00
1
GB0081_05
2
Use [
Select the function.
GB0091_00
2
6-41
] or [
] to scroll up and down.
Sending > WSD Scan
WSD Scan
WSD Scan saves images of originals scanned on this machine as files on a WSD-compatible computer.
NOTE
To use WSD Scan, confirm that the computer used for WSD scanning and the machine is network-connected, and
WSD Scan (page 9-19) is set to [On] in the network settings.
For information on operating the computer, refer to the computer’s help or the operation guide of your software.
Installing Driver Software (for Windows 7)
1
Display the window.
2
Install the driver.
From the Start menu, select Network.
Right-click the machine’s icon and then click Install.
NOTE
If the User Account Control window appears, click Continue.
If the Found New Hardware window appears, click Cancel.
During the installation, double-click the icon shown on the task bar to display the Driver
Software Installation screen. When Your devices are ready to use is displayed on the
Driver Software Installation screen, the installation is completed.
Using WSD
1
Press the Send key.
2
Place the originals.
For details, refer to Loading Originals on page 3-7.
6-42
Sending > WSD Scan
Display the screen.
Scan the originals.
Procedure using this machine
GB0648_00
1
2 Select the destination computer.
GB0649_00
4
2
Updates the list.
Displays information for individual destination computers.
3 Press the Start key.
Sending begins and the software installed on the computer is activated.
6-43
GB0055_01
1
GB0055_00
3
Sending > WSD Scan
Procedure from Your Computer
GB0648_00
1
2 Use the software installed on the computer to send the images.
6-44
Sending > Scanning using TWAIN
Scanning using TWAIN
This section explains how to scan an original using TWAIN.
The procedure for scanning using the TWAIN driver is explained as an example. The WIA driver is used in the same
way.
1
Display the window.
1 Activate the TWAIN compatible application.
2 Select the machine using the application and display the TWAIN dialog box.
NOTE
For selecting the machine, see the Operation Guide or Help for each application software.
2
Configure the function.
Select scanning settings in the TWAIN dialog box that opens.
The settings that appear in the TWAIN dialog box are as follows.
Item
Detail
Original
Configurations
Original Size
Select the scan size of the original.
Original
Orientation
Specify the type of binding.
Send
Configurations
Duplex Setting
Specify whether the original is one-sided or two-sided.
Image Quality
Configurations
Color Setting
Select the color mode.
Resolution
Select the resolution.
Image Quality
Select the image quality according to the type of original.
Density
Select the exposure.
Image Quality
Settings
Select the Auto button to have the exposure set
automatically based on the original.
Prevent Bleedthrough
6-45
Hide background colors and image bleed-through when
scanning thin original.
Sending > Scanning using TWAIN
Item
Detail
Configuration
3
This is used to check current settings and store frequently
used settings. When the Configuration button is clicked,
a setting screen opens with buttons for Details, Add
current configuration, and Delete selected
configuration.
Details
Current settings can be checked.
Add current
configuration
Save current settings with a name and comment.
Delete selected
configuration
Delete saved settings.
Place the originals.
For details, refer to Loading Originals on page 3-7.
4
Scan the originals.
Click the Scan button. The document data is scanned.
6-46
7
Document Box
This chapter explains the following topics:
Printing Documents Stored in Removable USB Memory ................................................................................... 7-2
Saving Documents to USB Memory (Scan to USB) ........................................................................................... 7-5
Removing USB Memory .................................................................................................................................... 7-8
Functions for Document Box .............................................................................................................................. 7-9
Duplex .................................................................................................................................................... 7-10
Encrypted PDF Password ....................................................................................................................... 7-11
JPEG/TIFF Print .................................................................................................................................... 7-12
XPS Fit to Page ..................................................................................................................................... 7-13
Storing Size ............................................................................................................................................ 7-14
7-1
Document Box > Printing Documents Stored in Removable USB Memory
Printing Documents Stored in Removable USB
Memory
Plugging USB memory directly into the machine enables you to quickly and easily print the files stored in the USB
memory without having to use a computer.
The following file types can be printed:
•
PDF file (Version 1.5)
•
TIFF file (TIFF V6/TTN2 format)
•
JPEG file
•
XPS file
•
Encrypted PDF file
PDF files you wish to print should have an extension (.pdf).
Files to be printed should be saved no further down than the top 3 folder levels.
Use USB memory properly formatted by this machine.
Plug the USB memory directly into the USB memory slot (A1). We do not guarantee that USB memory printing is error
free if a USB hub is used.
1
Plug the USB memory.
Plug the USB memory into the USB memory slot (A1).
When the message Removable Memory is recognized. Displaying files. Are you sure? is
displayed, press [Yes].
IMPORTANT
Use USB memory formatted by this machine. If a USB memory formatted by any other
device is used, The removable memory is not formatted. may appear.
Refer to Check of Device Status on page 8-11.
Display the screen.
2
7-2
GB0089_02
1
GB0089_00
2
Document Box > Printing Documents Stored in Removable USB Memory
1 When the machine reads the USB memory, Removable Memory screen may appear.
NOTE
If the screen does not appear, press the Document Box key and then [Removable
Memory].
2 Select and open the folder in which the file you wish to print is stored.
The machine will display documents in the top 3 folder levels, including the root folder. To
return to a higher level folder, press [Up].
3
Select the file.
GB0089_02
1
2
Displays details for individual files.
Select the file to be printed and press [Print].
Enter the quantity.
GB0097_00
4
NOTE
Press the Clear key to change the copy quantity.
Select the functions.
GB0097_00
5
Select the function to use for Document Box.
Press [Functions] to display other functions.
For details, refer to Functions for Document Box on page 7-9
7-3
Document Box > Printing Documents Stored in Removable USB Memory
6
Start printing.
Press the Start key to start printing.
Remove the USB memory.
For details, refer to Removing USB Memory on page 7-8.
7-4
Document Box > Saving Documents to USB Memory (Scan to USB)
Saving Documents to USB Memory (Scan to USB)
This function allows you to store scanned image files in USB memory connected to the machine. You can store files in
PDF, TIFF, JPEG or XPS format.
1
Place the originals.
For details, refer to Loading Originals on page 3-7.
2
Plug the USB memory.
Plug the USB memory into the USB memory slot (A1).
When the message Removable Memory is recognized. Displaying files. Are you sure? is
displayed, press [Yes].
IMPORTANT
Use USB memory formatted by this machine. If a USB memory formatted by any other
device is used, The removable memory is not formatted. may appear.
Refer to Check of Device Status on page 8-11.
Display the screen.
GB0089_00
3
7-5
Document Box > Saving Documents to USB Memory (Scan to USB)
When the machine reads the USB memory, Removable Memory screen may appear.
NOTE
If the screen does not appear, press the Document Box key and then [Removable
Memory].
4
Select the folder.
GB0089_02
2
GB0089_00
1
3
GB0107_00
4
Select the folder where the file will be stored and press [Menu] and then [Store File].
The machine will display the top 3 folder levels, including the root folder. To return to a higher
level folder, press [Up].
NOTE
Up to 100 documents and folders can be displayed for each directory. If the number of
documents and folders in a directory exceeds 100, you will be unable to save additional
documents.
Select the functions.
GB0096_00
5
Select the function to use for Document Box.
Press [Functions] to display other functions.
For details, refer to Functions for Document Box on page 7-9.
7-6
Document Box > Saving Documents to USB Memory (Scan to USB)
6
Start storing.
Press the Start key to start storing.
Remove the USB memory.
For details, refer to Removing USB Memory on page 7-8.
7-7
Document Box > Removing USB Memory
Removing USB Memory
Certain operations must be performed on the screen before USB memory can be removed.
IMPORTANT
Be sure to follow the proper procedure to avoid damaging the data or USB memory.
1
Display the screen.
2
2
GB0051_00
1
Select [Remove Memory].
Use [
] or [
] to scroll up and down.
GB0089_00
1
GB0107_01
2
3
3
Remove the USB memory.
Remove the USB memory after Removable Memory can be safely removed. is displayed.
NOTE
USB memory can also be removed after checking the status of the device.
For details, refer to Check of Device Status on page 8-11.
7-8
Document Box > Functions for Document Box
Functions for Document Box
Print or Store file screen in Document Box shows the commonly used functions. By pressing [Functions], other
selectable functions will be shown as a list. Use [ ] or [ ] to select the function.
When printing from USB memory
What do you want to do?
Reference Page
Specify the paper size and type.
Paper Selection  page 3-40
Collate the output documents in page order.
Collate/Offset  page 3-42
Offset the output documents by set.
Print on both sides of the paper.
Duplex  page 7-10
Change the paper output.
Paper Output  page 3-41
Staple in the output documents.
Staple  page 3-47
Add margins (white space).
Margin  page 3-44
Send notice by e-mail when a job is complete.
Job Finish Notice  page 3-59
Suspend the current job and override it to give a new job top priority.
Priority Override  page 3-62
Password-protect a PDF file.
Encrypted PDF Password  page 7-11
Set the image size (resolution) when printing a JPEG or TIFF file.
JPEG/TIFF Print  page 7-12
Print an XPS file so that it fits the paper size.
XPS Fit to Page  page 7-13
When storing a document to USB memory
What do you want to do?
Reference Page
Select the file format for images being stored.
File Format  page 3-56
Automatically scan 2-sided originals.
2-sided/Book Original  page 3-36
Set the resolution at which to scan originals.
Scan Resolution  page 3-50
Adjust the density.
Density  page 3-49
Add a file name to the job to easily check its status.
File Name Entry  page 3-61
Specify the original size.
Original Size  page 3-31
Specify the original orientation to scan in the correct direction.
Original Orientation  page 3-33
Scan mixed size originals.
Mixed Size Originals  page 3-34
Change the size at which to store an image
Storing Size  page 7-14
Change the color mode for images being stored.
Color Selection  page 3-58
Select original image type for best results.
Original Image  page 3-51
Emphasize the outline of texts or lines.
Sharpness  page 3-52
Blur the image outline.
Darken or lighten the background (i.e., the area with no text or images) of originals.
Background Density Adjust 
page 3-53
Prevent bleed-through for 2-sided originals.
Prevent Bleed-through  page 3-54
Enlarge or shrink originals according to the storing size.
Zoom  page 3-55
Scan a large number of originals separately and then produce as one job.
Continuous Scan  page 3-38
Send notice by e-mail when a job is complete.
Job Finish Notice  page 3-59
7-9
Document Box > Functions for Document Box
Duplex
Print a document 1-sided or 2-sided. Select the original binding orientation and desired final binding orientation.
2-sided
Print a 2-sided document so that the sheets are aligned properly for binding on the left or right
2-sided
Print a 2-sided document so that the sheets are aligned properly for binding on the top.
1
Display the screen.
1 Referring to Printing Documents Stored in Removable USB Memory on page 7-2, display
the screen.
GB0097_00
2
Select the function.
GB0065_00
2
7-10
Document Box > Functions for Document Box
Encrypted PDF Password
Enter the preassigned password to print the PDF data.
1
Display the screen.
1 Referring to Printing Documents Stored in Removable USB Memory on page 7-2, display
the screen.
2
GB0097_00
1
GB0099_01
2
Use [
] to scroll up and down.
Enter the password.
1
GB0057-21
2
] or [
2
Up to 256 characters can be entered.
Refer to Character Entry Method on page 11-7 for details on entering characters.
7-11
Document Box > Functions for Document Box
JPEG/TIFF Print
Select the image size when printing JPEG or TIFF files.
Paper Size
Fit the image size to the selected paper size.
Image Resolution
Print at resolution of the actual image.
Print Resolution
Fit the image size to the print resolution.
1
Display the screen.
1 Referring to Printing Documents Stored in Removable USB Memory on page 7-2, display
the screen.
2
GB0097_00
1
GB0099_01
2
Use [
Select the function.
GB0101_00
2
7-12
] or [
] to scroll up and down.
Document Box > Functions for Document Box
XPS Fit to Page
Reduces or enlarges the image size to fit to the selected paper size when printing XPS files.
1
Display the screen.
1 Referring to Printing Documents Stored in Removable USB Memory on page 7-2, display
the screen.
2
GB0097_00
1
GB0099_01
2
Use [
Select the function.
GB0102_00
2
7-13
] or [
] to scroll up and down.
Document Box > Functions for Document Box
Storing Size
Select size of image to be stored.
Same as Original Size
Store an image the same size as the original.
Metric
Select from A3, A4, A5, A5-R, B4, B5, B6, Folio or 216 × 340 mm.
inch
Select from Ledger, Letter, Legal, Statement, 11 × 15" or Oficio II.
Others
Select from 8K, 16K, Hagaki or Oufuku Hagaki,
Relationship between Original Size, Storing Size, and Zoom
Original Size (page 3-31), Storing Size, and Zoom (page 3-55) are related to each other. Refer to the following table.
Original Size and the size you wish to
store as are
the same
different
Original Size
Specify as necessary
Specify as necessary
Storing Size
Select [Same as Original]
Select the required size
Zoom
Select [100%] (or [Auto])
Select [Auto]
NOTE
When you select Storing Size that is different from Original Size, and select the Zoom [100%], you can sWRUH the image
as the actual size (No Zoom).
1
Display the screen.
1 Referring to Saving Documents to USB Memory (Scan to USB) on page 7-5, display the
screen.
2
GB0096_00
1
GB0098_00
2
Use [
Select the storing size.
[Same as Original Size]
GB0132_00
2
7-14
] or [
] to scroll up and down.
Document Box > Functions for Document Box
[Metric], [inch] or [Others]
2
GB0133_00
GB0132_01
1
Use [
Select the desired size.
7-15
] or [
] to scroll up and down.
Document Box > Functions for Document Box
7-16
8
Status / Job Cancel
This chapter explains the following topics:
Checking Job Status .......................................................................................................................................... 8-2
Details of the Status Screens ................................................................................................................... 8-3
Checking Job History ......................................................................................................................................... 8-6
Sending the Log History ..................................................................................................................................... 8-7
Setting the Destination ............................................................................................................................. 8-8
Automatic Log History Transmission ....................................................................................................... 8-9
Manual Log History Transmission ............................................................................................................ 8-9
Setting E-mail Subject ........................................................................................................................... 8-10
Check of Device Status ..................................................................................................................................... 8-11
Checking the Remaining Amount of Toner and Paper ..................................................................................... 8-13
8-1
Status / Job Cancel > Checking Job Status
Checking Job Status
Check the status of jobs being processed or waiting to be printed.
Available Status Screens
The processing and waiting statuses of jobs are displayed as a list on the touch panel in four different screens - Printing
Jobs, Sending Jobs, 6FKHGXOHG-REV, and Storing Jobs. The following job statuses are available.
Print Job Status
Copy
Printer
Printing from Document Box
FAX reception
E-mail reception
Job Report /List
Printing data from removable memory
Send Job Status
FAX transmission
Folder (SMB/FTP) transmission
E-mail
Application
Mixed (Multiple destination)
Store Job Status
Scan
FAX
Printer
Scheduled Job
Sending Job FAX using Delayed transmission
1
Display the screen.
2
GB0052_00
1
Press either of [Print Job Status], [Send Job Status], [Store Job Status] or [Scheduled Job] to
check the status.
Check the status.
GB0182_00
2
Refer to Print Job Status Screen on page 8-3, Send Job Status screen on page 8-4, Store Job
Status screen on page 8-5, and Scheduled Job screen on page 8-5.
8-2
Status / Job Cancel > Checking Job Status
Details of the Status Screens
Print Job Status Screen
GB0182_00
5
1
No.
1
2
3 4
Item/Key
—
6
Detail
Icons that indicate the job type
Copy job
Printer job
Job from Document Box
FAX reception
E-mail reception
Report/List
Data from removable memory
2
[Cancel]
Select the job to be canceled from the list, and press this key.
3
[...]
Press […] for the job for which you wish to display detailed information.
4
[Pause All Print Jobs]
Pauses all the printing jobs. By pressing this key again, the printing jobs will be resumed.
5
—
Status of job
Printing
Printing (priority override)
Printing (interrupt copying)
Print Waiting
Print Waiting (priority override)
Print Waiting (interrupt copying)
Pausing print job or error
Canceling the job
The status before starting to print.
The status before starting to print. (priority override)
The status before starting to print. (interrupt copying)
Printing has been suspended due to priority override or interrupt copy operation.
6
[Close]
Closes the Print Job Status screen.
8-3
Status / Job Cancel > Checking Job Status
Send Job Status screen
GB0183_00
5
1 2
No.
1
3
4
Display/Key
—
6
Detail
Icons that indicate the job type
Sending Job FAX
Sending Job Folder (SMB/FTP)
Sending Job E-mail
Sending Job Application
Sending Job Mixed (Multiple)
2
[Menu]*
Pressing this key displays [Priority Override]. This function allows you to give a particular fax
job priority.
Select the fax job you wish to send immediately and then press [Menu], followed by [Priority
Override].
3
[Cancel]
Select the job you want to cancel from the list, and press this key.
4
[...]
Press […] for the job for which you wish to display detailed information.
5
—
Status of job
Sending
Sending Waiting
A job for which immediate transmission was specified is waiting for transmission to start.
Pausing the job or error
Canceling the job
The status before starting sending such as during scanning originals
6
*
[Close]
Closes the Send Job Status screen.
This function is displayed when the optional fax is installed.
8-4
Status / Job Cancel > Checking Job Status
Store Job Status screen
GB0184_00
4
1
No.
1
2
3
Display/Key
—
5
Details
Icons that indicate the job type
Storing Job Scan
Storing Job Printer
Storing Job FAX
2
[Cancel]
Select the job you want to cancel from the list, and press this key.
3
[...]
Press […] for the job for which you wish to display detailed information.
4
—
Status of job
Storing Data
Pausing the job or error
Canceling the job
The status before starting to save such as during scanning originals
5
[Close]
Closes the Store Job Status screen.
Scheduled Job screen
GB0185_00
5
1 2
No.
1
3
4
Display/Key
—
6
Details
Icons that indicate the job type
Sending Job FAX
2
[Menu]
Pressing this key displays [Start Now]. Select the job you wish to send immediately and then
press [Menu], followed by [Start Now].
3
[Cancel]
Select the job you want to cancel from the list, and press this key.
4
[...]
Press […] for the job for which you wish to display detailed information.
5
—
Status of job
Sending Waiting
6
[Close]
Closes the Scheduled Job screen.
8-5
Status / Job Cancel > Checking Job History
Checking Job History
Check the history of completed jobs.
Available Job History Screens
The job histories are displayed separately in three screens - Printing Jobs, Sending Jobs, and Storing Jobs. The
following job histories are available.
Print Job Log
Copy
Send Job Log
Printer
Folder (SMB/FTP)
FAX reception
E-mail
E-mail reception
Application
Printing from Document Box
Mixed (Multiple destination)
Job Report/List
Printing data from removable
memory
1
FAX
Store Job Log
Scan
FAX
Printer
Display the screen.
2
GB0052_01
1
Use [
] or [
] to scroll up and down.
Press either of [Print Job Log], [Send Job Log], or [Store Job Log] to check the log.
Check the log.
GB0186_00
2
Displays details for individual jobs.
Press [Close] to exit the screen.
NOTE
The job history can be sent by E-mail.
For details, refer to Sending the Log History on page 8-7.
8-6
Status / Job Cancel > Sending the Log History
Sending the Log History
You can send the log history by e-mail. You can either send it manually as needed or have it sent automatically
whenever a set number of jobs is reached.
1
Display the screen.
2
GB0054_00
1
GB0560_00
3
GB0723_00
NOTE
If user login administration is enabled, you can only change the settings by logging in with
administrator privileges.
Configure the function.
GB0578_00
2
Refer to Setting the Destination on page 8-8, Automatic Log History Transmission on page 8-9,
Manual Log History Transmission on page 8-9 and Setting E-mail Subject on page 8-10.
8-7
Status / Job Cancel > Sending the Log History
Setting the Destination
Set the destination to which log histories are sent.
1
Display the screen.
1 Referring to Sending the Log History on page 8-7, display the screen.
2
2
Set the destination.
Select from the Address Book.
Searches by destination name.
2
GB0398_00
GB0583_00
1
Allows you to search for and sort
destinations.
Displays details for individual destinations.
Enter a new e-mail address.
2
3
Up to 128 characters can be entered.
Refer to Character Entry Method on page 11-7 for details on entering characters.
8-8
GB0057_22
1
GB0583_00
2
GB0581_00
GB0578_00
1
Status / Job Cancel > Sending the Log History
Automatic Log History Transmission
This function automatically sends the log history to the specified destinations whenever a set number of jobs has been
logged.
1
Display the screen.
1 Referring to Sending the Log History on page 8-7, display the screen.
GB0578_00
2
Select the function.
1
GB0579_00
2
3
Press [On] and enter the number of jobs in the log history print. You can enter any number
between 1 and 16.
Manual Log History Transmission
You can also send the log history to the specified destinations manually.
1
Display the screen.
2
Send the log history.
Referring to Sending the Log History on page 8-7, display the screen.
GB0578_00
3
8-9
GB0580_00
2
Status / Job Cancel > Sending the Log History
Setting E-mail Subject
Set the subject automatically entered when sending log histories by E-mail.
1
Display the screen.
1 Referring to Sending the Log History on page 8-7, display the screen.
GB0578_00
2
Enter an E-mail subject.
1
GB0057_23
2
2
Up to 60 characters can be entered.
Refer to Character Entry Method on page 11-7 for details on entering characters.
8-10
Status / Job Cancel > Check of Device Status
Check of Device Status
Configure the devices/lines installed or connected to this machine or check their status. You can also control devices
depending on their status.
1
Display the screen.
2
GB0052_01
1
Use [ ] or [
and down.
] to scroll up
GB0052_02
2
GB0052_03
2
Select the device you wish to check.
GB0190_00
Check the status.
GB0189_00
2
Scanner
The status of an original scanning in the document processor or the error LQIRUPDWLRQ
(paper jam, opened cover, etc.) is displayed.
Printer
Error information such as paper jam, out of toner, or out of paper, and status such as waiting or
printing are displayed.
8-11
GB0194_00
GB0191_00
Status / Job Cancel > Check of Device Status
FAX (Option)
•
The information such as sending/receiving and dialing is displayed.
•
Press [Line Off] to cancel a fax in sending/receiving.
For details, refer to the FAX Operation Guide.
USB Memory
•
The usage and capacity of the external media connected to this machine are displayed.
•
Press [Menu] and then [Format] to format external media.
•
Press [Remove] to safely remove the external media. This operation is the same as that for
Removing USB Memory on page 7-8.
8-12
Status / Job Cancel > Checking the Remaining Amount of Toner and Paper
Checking the Remaining Amount of Toner and
Paper
Check the remaining amount of toner, paper, and staples on the touch panel.
1
Display the screen.
2
GB0052_02
1
Use [ ] or [
and down.
] to scroll up
GB0052_03
2
Select the consumable you wish to check.
GB0193_00
_00
GB0192_00
Check the status.
Toner Status
You can check the remaining amount of toner as one of 11 levels from 100 to 0%, and check
the status of waste toner box.
Paper Status
The remaining amount of paper is shown by four levels as 100%, 70%, 30%, and 0% (none),
however, the paper in the multi purpose tray is shown by two levels as 100% and 0%. If there
is no paper in either cassette, the paper status will be shown as No Paper.
GB0195_00
2
Staple Status
You can check the status of staples
8-13
Status / Job Cancel > Checking the Remaining Amount of Toner and Paper
8-14
9
Setup, Registration,
and User Management
This chapter explains the following topics:
System Menu ..................................................................................................................................................... 9-2
Operation Method .................................................................................................................................... 9-2
System Menu Settings ............................................................................................................................. 9-3
Report ...................................................................................................................................................... 9-5
User Property ........................................................................................................................................... 9-7
Cassette/MP Tray Settings ...................................................................................................................... 9-8
Common Settings .................................................................................................................................... 9-9
Copy ...................................................................................................................................................... 9-15
Send ...................................................................................................................................................... 9-15
Printer .................................................................................................................................................... 9-16
System ................................................................................................................................................... 9-17
Date/Timer ............................................................................................................................................. 9-21
Adjustment/Maintenance ....................................................................................................................... 9-22
User Login Administration ................................................................................................................................ 9-25
First User Login Administration .............................................................................................................. 9-25
User Login Settings ............................................................................................................................... 9-26
Enabling/Disabling User Login Administration ....................................................................................... 9-27
Local User Authorization ........................................................................................................................ 9-29
Adding a User ........................................................................................................................................ 9-30
Editing and Deleting Users .................................................................................................................... 9-35
Simple Login .......................................................................................................................................... 9-38
Group Authorization ............................................................................................................................... 9-44
Obtain Network User Property ............................................................................................................... 9-48
Job Accounting ................................................................................................................................................ 9-50
First Job Accounting Setup .................................................................................................................... 9-50
Job Accounting Settings ........................................................................................................................ 9-52
Enabling/Disabling Job Accounting ....................................................................................................... 9-53
Login/Logout .......................................................................................................................................... 9-54
Adding an Account ................................................................................................................................. 9-55
Editing and Deleting Accounts ............................................................................................................... 9-57
Restricting the Use of the Machine ........................................................................................................ 9-59
Counting the Number of Pages Printed ................................................................................................. 9-61
Printing an Accounting Report ............................................................................................................... 9-63
Job Accounting Default Setting .............................................................................................................. 9-64
Unknown Login User Name Job ............................................................................................................ 9-66
9-1
Setup, Registration, and User Management > System Menu
System Menu
Configure settings related to overall machine operation.
Operation Method
The system menu is operated as follows:
2
Configure the function.
Displays available
functions.
GB0054_04
Display the screen.
Displays available
functions.
GB0610_00
1
Scrolls up and down
when the list of values
cannot be displayed in
its entirety on a single
screen.
Return to the previous
screen.
GB0614_00
Selecting a value it to be
accepted.
Returns to the original screen
without making any changes.
Accepts the settings and exits.
GB0723_00
NOTE
In order to change settings that require administer privileges, you must log in with
administrator privileges.Refer to Adding a User on page 9-30 for the default login user name
and password.
Refer to System Menu Settings on the following page and configure as needed.
9-2
Setup, Registration, and User Management > System Menu
System Menu Settings
System Menu include;
Item
Description
Reference
Page
Quick Setup Wizard
The Quick Setup Wizard configures fax, cassette, and Energy Saver
settings.
3-25
Language
Select the language displayed on the touch panel.
9-5
Report
Print reports to check the machine settings and status. Default settings
for printing the result reports can also be configured.
9-5
Counter
This counts the number of pages printed or scanned.
3-11
User Property
Allows you to view information about logged in users and edit some of
that information.
9-7
Cassette/MP Tray Settings
Select paper size and media type for Cassette 1 to 3 and multi purpose
tray.
9-8
Common Settings
Configures overall machine operation.
9-9
Default Screen
Select the screen appearing right after start-up (default screen).
9-9
Sound
Set options for buzzer sound during the machine operations.
9-9
Original Settings
Configures settings for originals.
9-9
Paper Settings
Configures settings for paper.
9-10
Function Defaults
Defaults are the values automatically set after the warm-up is completed
or the Reset key is pressed.
9-12
Set the defaults for available settings such as copying and sending.
Setting the frequently-used values as defaults makes subsequent jobs
easier.
Paper Output
Select output tray respectively for copy jobs, print jobs from Custom
Box, computers, and FAX RX data.
9-13
Preset Limit
Restrict the number of copies that can be made at one time.
9-13
Error Handling
Select whether to cancel or continue the job when error has occurred.
9-14
Measurement
Select inch or metric for the unit for paper dimensions.
9-14
Keyboard Layout
Change the layout of the touch panel keyboard used to enter
characters.
9-14
USB Keyboard Type
Select the type of USB keyboard that you want to use.
9-15
Copy
Configures settings for copying functions.
9-15
Send
Configures settings for sending functions.
9-15
Document Box
Configures settings related to the Job Box and Sub Address Box. For
details on Job Box, refer to Printing on page 5-1 and for details on Sub
Address Box, refer to the Operation Guide for FAX kit.
—
FAX
Configures settings for fax functions. Refer to the Operation Guide for
FAX kit.
—
Address Book/One Touch
Configures Address Book and One Touch Key settings. For details on
Address Book, refer to Registering Destinations in the Address Book on
page 6-24 and for details on One Touch Key, refer to Adding a
Destination on One Touch Key on page 6-33.
—
9-3
Setup, Registration, and User Management > System Menu
Item
Description
Reference
Page
User Login/Job Accounting
Configures settings related to machine management. For details on
User Login, refer to User Login Administration on page 9-25, and for
details on Job Accounting, refer to Job Accounting on page 9-50.
—
Printer
Printing from computers, settings are generally made on the application
software screen. However, the following settings are available for
configuring the defaults to customize the machine.
9-16
System
Configures machine system settings.
9-17
Network
Configures network settings.
9-17
Interface Block Setting
This allows you to protect this machine by blocking the interface with
external devices such as USB hosts or optional interfaces.
9-21
Security Level
The Security Level setting is primarily a menu option used by service
personnel for maintenance work. There is no need for customers to use
this menu.
—
Restart
Restart the CPU without turning the main power switch off. Use this to
deal with any unstable operation by the machine. (Same as the
computer restart.)
—
RAM Disk Setting
When optional memory is installed, a RAM disk can be created and its
size can be set. Creating a RAM disk makes it possible to print from a
Job Box.
9-21
Optional Memory
When optional memory is installed, select the memory allocation
scheme based on the application in which you are using the equipment.
9-21
Optional Function
You can use the optional applications installed on this machine.
11-5
Date/Timer
Configures settings related to the date and time.
9-21
Adjustment/Maintenance
Adjust printing quality and conduct machine maintenance.
9-22
9-4
Setup, Registration, and User Management > System Menu
Language
Item
Language
Description
Select the language displayed on the touch panel.
Value: English, Deutsch, Français, Español, Italiano, Nederlands, Русский, Português
Report
Print reports to check the machine settings and status. Default settings for printing the result reports can also be
configured.
Report Print
Item
Status Page
Description
Prints the status page, allowing you to check the information including current settings,
available memory space, and optional equipment installed.
Status Page
Font List
Prints the font list, allowing you to check the font samples installed in the machine.
Network Status
Prints the network status, allowing you to check the information including network interface
firmware version, network address and protocol.
Network Status Page
Firmware Version
9-5
Setup, Registration, and User Management > System Menu
Item
Service Status
Description
Prints the service status. More detailed information is available than on the Status Page.
Service personnel usually print the service status pages for maintenance purpose.
AccountLQJ List3rints the accounting list, allowing you to check the accounts that have been registered on the
machine.
ACCOUNT.REPORT
Firmware Version
Result Report Settings
Item
Send Result Report
E-mail/Folder
Description
Automatically print a report of transmission result when a transmission is complete.
Automatically print a report of transmission result when E-mail or SMB/FTP transmission is
complete.
Value: Off, On, Error Only
Canceled before
Sending
Job Finish Notice Setting
Print a send result report if the job is canceled before being sent.
Value: Off, On
Attaches sent images to job finish notices.
Value: Do Not Attach Image, Attach Image
Sending Log History
You can send the log history by e-mail. You can either send it manually as needed or have it sent automatically
whenever a set number of jobs is reached.
Refer to Sending the Log History on page 8-7.
9-6
Setup, Registration, and User Management > System Menu
User Property
Allows you to view information about logged in users and edit some of that information.
For details on User Login, refer to User Login Administration on page 9-25.
Item
Description
User Name
Changes the name shown on the user list. Up to 32 characters can be entered.
Login User Name
Displays the login user name that is entered at login.
Login Password
Changes the password that is entered at login. Up to 64 characters can be entered.
Access Level
Displays the user's access level.
Account Name
Displays the account to which the user belongs.
E-mail Address
Changes the user's e-mail address. Up to 128 characters can be entered.
Simple Login
When simple login is enabled, changes associated settings.
My Panel
Registers settings for individual users. Settings registered here can be applied simply by
logging in. Network users are not displayed.
Group Name
When group authorization is enabled, displays the name shown in the group list.
Group ID
When group authorization is enabled, displays the ID shown in the group list.
9-7
Setup, Registration, and User Management > System Menu
Cassette/MP Tray Settings
Select paper size and media type for Cassette 1 to 3 and multi purpose tray.
Cassette1 (to 3)
Item
Paper Size
Description
Set the paper size to load in Cassette 1 and optional paper feeders (Cassette 2 and 3).
Value
Auto: Automatically detect paper size. Select [Metric] or [Inch] for paper size.
Metric: Select from A3, A4-R, A4, A5-R, B4, B5-R, B5, Folio or 216 × 340 mm.
inch: Select from Ledger, Letter-R, Letter, Legal, Statement-R or Oficio II.
others: Select from 8K, 16K-R, or 16K.
Media Type
Set the media type to load in Cassette 1 and optional paper feeders (Cassette 2 and 3).
Value: Plain (105 g/m² or less), Rough, Vellum (64 g/m² or less), Recycled, Preprinted, Bond,
Color, Prepunched, Letterhead, Thick (106 g/m² and more), High Quality, Custom 1-8
NOTE: To print on preprinted or prepunched paper or on letterhead, refer to Special Paper
Action on page 9-11.
To change to a media type other than [Plain], refer to Media Type Setting on page 9-10.
When the paper weight settings shown below are selected, the media indicated for each
setting cannot be selected.
Rough: Heavy 3
Bond: Heavy 3
Thick: Heavy 3 or Extra Heavy
Custom 1 to 8: Heavy3 or Extra Heavy
Refer to Media Type Setting on page 9-10 for selecting Custom 1- 8.
Multi Purpose Tray
Item
Paper Size
Description
Set the paper size for multi-purpose tray.
Value
Metric: Select from A3, A4-R, A4, A5-R, A6-R, B4, B5-R, B5, B6-R, Folio or 216 × 340 mm.
inch: Select from Ledger, Letter-R, Letter, Legal, Statement-R, Executive or Oficio II.
others: Select from 8K, 16K-R, 16K, ISO B5, Envelope #10, Envelope #9, Envelope #6,
Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Envelope C4, Hagaki, Oufuku Hagaki, Youkei
4, Youkei 2 or Custom.
Size Entry: Enter a size not displayed in the standard sizes.
Inch models – X: 3.86 to 11.69" (in 0.01" increments), Y: 5.83 to 17" (in 0.01" increments)
Metric models – X: 98 to 297 mm (in 1 mm increments), Y: 148 to 432 mm (in 1 mm
increments)
NOTE: For instructions on how to specify the custom paper size, refer to Custom Paper
Size on page 9-10.
Media Type
Set the media type for multi-purpose tray.
Value: Plain (105 g/m² or less), Transparency, Rough, Vellum (64 g/m² or less), Labels,
Recycled, Preprinted, Bond, Cardstock, Color, Prepunched, Letterhead, Envelope, Thick
(106 g/m² and more), High Quality, Custom 1-8
NOTE: To print on preprinted or prepunched paper or on letterhead, refer to Special Paper
Action on page 9-11.
Refer to Media Type Setting on page 9-10 for selecting Custom 1- 8.
9-8
Setup, Registration, and User Management > System Menu
Common Settings
Configures overall machine operation.
Default Screen
Item
Default Screen
Description
Select the screen appearing right after start-up (default screen).
Value: Copy, Send, FAX, Document Box, Favorites, Status
Sound
Item
Buzzer
Description
Set options for buzzer sound during the machine operations.
Volume
Set the buzzer volume level.
Value: 0 (Mute), 1 (Minimum) to 5 (Maximum)
Key Confirmation
Emit a sound when the operation panel and touch panel keys are pressed.
Value: Off, On
Job Finish
Emit a sound when a print job is normally completed.
Value: Off, On, FAX 5HFHSWLRQOnly
NOTE: [FAX 5HFHSWLRQOnly] is displayed when the optional fax is installed.
Ready
Emit a sound when the warm-up is completed.
Value: Off, On
Warning
Emit a sound when errors occur.
Value: Off, On
Key Confirmation (USB
Keyboard)
Emit a sound when a key on the optional USB keyboard is pressed.
Value: Off, On
Original Settings
Item
Custom Original Size
Description
Set up frequently-used custom original size. The custom size option is displayed on the screen
to select original size.
To register a custom paper size, press [On] and enter the desired size. The custom size option
is displayed on the screen to select original size.
Value
Custom Size: Off, On
Size Entry
Inch models – X: 2 to 17" (in 0.01" increments), Y: 2 to 11.69" (in 0.01" increments)
Metric models – X: 50 to 432 mm (in 1 mm increments), Y: 50 to 297 mm (in 1 mm increments)
9-9
Setup, Registration, and User Management > System Menu
Item
Original Auto Detect
A6/Hagaki
Description
Automatically detect originals of special or non-standard size.
As A6 and Hagaki are similar in size, select either one of them for automatic detection.
Value: A6, Hagaki
Folio
Select Folio for automatic detection.
Value: Off, On
11 × 15"
Select the 11×15" size for automatic detection.
Value: Off, On
Paper Settings
Item
Custom Paper Size
Description
Set up frequently-used custom paper size.
To register a custom paper size, press [On] and enter the desired size. The custom size option
is displayed on the screen to select paper set in the multi purpose tray.
Value
Custom Size: Off, On
Size Entry
Inch models – X: 5.83 to 17" (in 0.01" increments), Y: 3.86 to 11.69" (in 0.01" increments)
Metric models – X: 148 to 432 mm (in 1 mm increments), Y: 98 to 297 mm (in 1 mm
increments)
Media Type Setting
Select weight for each media type.
For Custom 1-8, settings for duplex printing and media type name can be changed.
For details, refer to Media Type Setting on page 9-11.
Default Paper Source
Select the default paper source from Cassette 1-3 and multi purpose tray.
Value: Cassette 1 to 3, Multi Purpose Tray
Paper Selection
Set the default paper selection.
Value
Auto: Automatically select the cassette containing paper in the same size as originals.
Default Paper Source: Select paper source set by Default Paper Source.
Media for Auto (B&W)
Select a default media type for auto paper selection when [Auto] is selected of Paper Selection.
If Plain is selected, the paper source with plain paper loaded in the specific size is selected.
Select [All Media Types] for the paper source with any kind of paper loaded in the specific size.
Value: All Media Types, Plain, Transparency, Rough, Vellum, Labels, Recycled, Preprinted,
Bond, Cardstock, Color, Prepunched, Letterhead, Envelope, Thick, Custom 1 to 8
9-10
Setup, Registration, and User Management > System Menu
Item
Description
Special Paper Action
When printing on Prepunched, Preprint, and Letterhead, punch-holes might not be aligned or
the print direction might be upside-down depending on how originals are set and the
combination of copying functions. In such a case, select [Adjust Print Direction] to adjust the
print direction. When paper orientation is not important, select [Speed Priority].
Example: copying on Letterhead
Original
Paper
Finished
Cassette
Multi Purpose Tray
Original
Paper
Finished
Cassette
Multi Purpose Tray
Value: Adjust Print Direction, Speed Priority
Media Type Setting
Select the media type you wish to change, press [Paper weight], and select the weight.
Paper
Weight
*
Light
Normal 1
Normal 2
Normal 3
Heavy 1
Heavy 2
Heavy 3
Extra
Heavy
Weight (g/m²)
64 g/m²
or less
60 g/m²
to
75 g/m²
76 g/m²
to
90 g/m²
91 g/m²
to
105 g/m²
106 g/m² to
128 g/m²
129 g/m² to
163 g/m²
164 g/m²
and more
Transparencies
Plain
Y
Y
Y (default)
Y
N
N
N
N
Transparency
N
N
N
N
Y*
Y*
Y*
Y* (default)
Rough
Y
Y
Y
Y (default)
Y*
Y*
Y*
N
Vellum
Y (default)
Y
Y
Y
N
N
N
N
Labels
Y*
Y*
Y*
Y*
Y* (default)
Y*
Y*
Y*
Recycled
Y
Y
Y (default)
Y
N
N
N
N
Preprinted
Y
Y
Y (default)
Y
N
N
N
N
Bond
Y
Y
Y
Y (default)
Y
Y
Y*
N
Cardstock
N
N
N
N
Y*
Y* (default)
Y*
Y*
Color
Y
Y
Y (default)
Y
N
N
N
N
Prepunched
Y
Y
Y (default)
Y
N
N
N
N
Letterhead
Y
Y
Y (default)
Y
N
N
N
N
Envelope
N
N
N
N
Y*
Y* (default)
Y*
Y*
Thick
N
N
N
N
Y
Y (default)
Y*
Y*
High Quality
Y
Y
Y (default)
Y
N
N
N
N
Custom 1-8
Y
Y
Y (default)
Y
Y
Y
Y*
Y*
The media type cannot be selected for the cassettes.
Y: Available N: Not available
9-11
Setup, Registration, and User Management > System Menu
For Custom 1-8, settings for duplex printing and media type name can be changed.
Item
Custom 1-8
Description
Duplex
Select the setting for duplex.
Value: Prohibit, Permit
Name
Change names for Custom 1-8. Names should be not more than 16 characters. Selecting
media type at multi purpose tray, the name after change will be displayed.
Function Defaults
Item
File Format
Description
Select the default type of the files to be sent.
Value: PDF, TIFF, JPEG, XPS
Original Orientation
Set the original orientation defaults.
Value: Top Edge Top, Top Edge Left
Collate/Offset
Set the defaults for Collate/Offset.
Value: Off, Collate Only, Offset Each Page, Offset Each Set
File Separation
Select the default file separation setting.
Value: Off, Each Page
Scan Resolution
Select the default scanning resolution.
Value: 600×600dpi, 400×400dpi Ultra, 300×300dpi, 200×400dpi Super, 200×200dpi Fine,
200×100dpi Normal
NOTE: Use of [400×400dpi Ultra] and [600×600dpi] requires the optional expansion
memory (256 MB or more).
Color Selection
Select the default color mode for scanning documents.
Value: Auto (Color/Gray), Auto Color (Color/B & W), Full Color, Grayscale, Black & White
Original Image
Set the default original document type.
Value: Text+Photo, Photo, Text, Graphic/Map, Text (for OCR), Copy/Printout
Background Density Adj.
Select the default value for background density adjustment.
Value: Off, Auto, Manual (Darker -5)
EcoPrint
Select the EcoPrint default.
Value: Off, On
Prevent Bleed-through
Set the default value for preventing bleed-through.
Value: Off, On
Zoom
Select the enlarged/reduced default when paper size/sending size changed after the originals
set.
Value: 100%, Auto
Margin
Set the default margin.
Value
Left/Right: -18 to 18, Top/Bottom: -18 to 18
Left/Right: -0.75 to 0.75, Top/Bottom: -0.75 to 0.75
Continuous Scan
Set the continuous scan defaults.
Value: Off, On
Auto Image Rotation
Select the default Auto Image Rotation setting.
Value: Off, On
9-12
Setup, Registration, and User Management > System Menu
Item
File Name Entry
Description
Set an automatically entered name (default) for jobs. Additional information such as Date and
Time and Job No. can also be set.
Value
File Name: Up to 32 characters can be entered.
Additional Info: None, Date and Time, Job No., Job No. & Date and Time, Date and Time & Job
No.
E-mail Subject/Body
Set the subject and body automatically entered (default subject and body) when sending the
scanned originals by E-mail.
Value
Subject: Up to 60 characters can be entered.
Body: Up to 500 characters can be entered.
FTP Encrypted TX
Set the default value for document encryption during transmission.
Value: Off, On
NOTE: This setting is displayed when the secure protocol [SSL] setting is [On].
JPEG/TIFF Print
Select the image size (resolution) when printing JPEG or TIFF file.
Value: Paper Size, Image Resolution, Print Resolution
XPS Fit to Page
Set the default value for the XPS fit to page function.
Value: Off, On
Detail Settings
Image Quality
—
Set the default value for the image quality adjustment range when selecting the file format with
which to send and store images.
Value: 1 Low (High Comp.), 2, 3, 4, 5 High (Low Comp.)
PDF/A
Set the default value for PDF/A when selecting the file format with which to send and store
images.
Value: Off, PDF/A-1a, PDF/A-1b
Paper Output
Item
Paper Output
Description
Select output tray respectively for copy jobs, print jobs from Job Box, computers, and FAX RX
data.
Value: Inner Tray, Finisher Tray, Job Separator Tray
NOTE: [Finisher Tray] is displayed when the optional document finisher is installed.
Preset Limit
Item
Preset Limit
Description
Restrict the number of copies that can be made at one time.
Value: 1 to 999 copies.
9-13
Setup, Registration, and User Management > System Menu
Error Handling
Item
Duplexing Error
Description
Select what to do when duplex printing is not possible for the selected paper size and media
type.
Value
1-sided: Printed in 1-sided
Display Error: Error message to cancel printing is displayed.
Finishing Error
Select alternative actions when finishing (stapling or offsetting) is not available for the selected
paper size or media type.
Value
Ignore: The setting is ignored and the job is printed.
Display Error: Error message to cancel printing is displayed.
No Staple Error
Select what to do when staples run out during printing.
Value
Ignore: Printing continues without stapling.
Display Error: Error message to cancel printing is displayed.
NOTE: This function requires the optional document finisher.
Stapling Limit Error
Select what to do when stapling capacity is exceeded during printing.
Value
Ignore: Printing continues without stapling.
Display Error: Error message to cancel printing is displayed.
NOTE: This function requires the optional document finisher.
Paper Mismatch Error
Select what to do when the selected paper size or type does not match paper size or type
loaded in the specified paper source while printing from the computer by specifying the
cassette or multi-purpose tray.
Value
Ignore: The setting is ignored and the job is printed.
Display Error: Error message to cancel printing is displayed.
Inserted Paper Mismatch
Select what to do when the paper size set for the paper source does not match the paper size
that was actually loaded.
Value
Ignore: The setting is ignored and the job is printed.
Display Error: Error message to cancel printing is displayed.
Measurement
Item
Measurement
Description
Select inch or metric for the unit for paper dimensions.
Value: mm, inch
Keyboard Layout
Item
Keyboard Layout
Description
Change the layout of the touch panel keyboard used to enter characters.
Value: QWERTY, QWERTZ, AZERTY
9-14
Setup, Registration, and User Management > System Menu
USB Keyboard Type
Item
USB Keyboard Type
Description
Select the type of USB keyboard that you want to use.
Value: US-English, US-English with Euro
Copy
Configures settings for copying functions.
Item
Auto Paper Selection
Description
If [Auto] is selected for Paper Selection, set the paper size selection method when the zoom
changes.
Value
Most Suitable Size: Select paper based on the current zoom and the size of the original.
Same as Original Size: Select paper that matches the size of the original, regardless the zoom.
Auto % Priority
When a paper source of different size from the original is selected, select whether automatic
zoom (reduce/zoom) is performed.
Value: Off, On
Reserve Next Priority
Once the scan of the original is complete, the basic screen will be displayed, and you can
proceed to the next operation.
Value: Off, On
Send
Configures settings for sending functions.
Item
Dest. Check before Send
Description
When performing sending jobs, display the confirmation screen of destinations after pressing
the Start key.
Value: Off, On
Entry Check for New Dest.
When adding new destination, display the entry check screen to check the entered destination.
Value: Off, On
Send and Forward
Forward
Set whether to send the original to another destination and store it when sending images.
Set the target to send the original. Multiple storage targets can be selected.
Value
Forward: Off, On
Target: FAX, E-mail, Folder(SMB), Folder(FTP)
Destination
Set the destination to use when storing originals.
Select the destination using either of the following methods:
• Address Book
• Ext. Address Book
• Address Entry (E-mail)
• Address Entry (Folder)
Color TIFF Compression
Select the compression method for TIFF images handled on this machine.
Value: TIFF V6, TTN2
Default Screen
Use this procedure to set the default screen displayed when you press the Send key.
Value: Destination, Address Book, Ext Address Book, One Touch
9-15
Setup, Registration, and User Management > System Menu
Printer
Printing from computers, settings are generally made on the application software screen. However, the following
settings are available for configuring the defaults to customize the machine.
Item
Emulation
Description
Select the emulation for operating this machine by commands oriented to other types of
printers.
Value: PCL6, KPDL, KPDL(Auto)
KPDL Error Report
When an error has occurred during printing in KPDL emulation mode, set whether or not the
error report is output.
Value: Off, On
EcoPrint
EcoPrint conserves toner when printing. This is recommended for test copies where faded
printing is not a problem.
Value: Off, On
Override A4/Letter
Select whether to treat A4 size and Letter, which are similar in size, as the same size when
printing.
Value
Off: A4 and Letter are not regarded as the same in size.
On: A4 and Letter are regarded as the same in size. The machine will use whichever size is in
the paper source.
Duplex
Select binding orientation for duplex mode.
Value: 1-sided, 2-sided Bind LongEdge, 2-sided Bind ShortEdge
Copies
Set the default number of copies, from 1 to 999.
Value: 1 to 999 copies
Orientation
Set the default orientation, [Portrait] or [Landscape].
Value: Portrait, Landscape
Wide A4
Turn this to on to increase the maximum number of characters that can be printed in a line for
an A4 page (78 characters at 10 pitch) and Letter size page (80 characters at 10 pitch). This
setting is only effective in PCL 6 emulation.
Value: Off, On
Form Feed TimeOut
Receiving print data from the computer, the machine may sometimes wait if there is no
information signaling that the last page does not have any more data to be printed. When the
preset timeout passes, the machine automatically prints paper. The options are between 5 and
495 seconds.
Value: 5 to 495 seconds
LF Action
Set the line feed action when the machine receives the line feed code (character code 0AH).
Value: LF Only, LF and CR, Ignore LF
CR Action
Set the character return action when the machine receives the character return code (character
code 0DH).
Value: CR Only, LF and CR, Ignore CR
Paper Feed Mode
While printing from the computer, select how to feed paper when the paper source and type are
specified.
Value
Auto: Search the paper source that matches the selected paper size and type.
Fixed: Print on paper loaded in the specified paper source.
9-16
Setup, Registration, and User Management > System Menu
Item
Resolution
Description
Set the resolution used for printing.
Value: 600 dpi, Fast1200
KIR
The machine is equipped with the smoothing function, which realizes an excellent output
resolution of about 2400 dpi × 600 dpi.
Value: Off, On
System
Configures machine system settings.
Network
Configures network settings.
Host Name
Item
Host Name
Description
Check the host name of the machine.
TCP/IP Settings
Item
TCP/IP Settings
Description
Set up TCP/IP to connect to the Windows network.*
Value: Off, On
IPv4
Set up TCP/IP (IPv4) to connect to the network. The IPv4 setting is available when selecting
[On] for [TCP/IP Setting].
DHCP
Select whether or not to use the DHCP (IPv4) server.*
Value: Off, On
Bonjour
Select whether or not to use Bonjour.*
Value: Off, On
Auto-IP
Select whether or not to use Auto-IP.*
Value: Off, On
IP Address
Set the IP addresses.*
Value: ###.###.###.###
Subnet Mask
Set the IP subnet masks.*
Value: ###.###.###.###
Default Gateway
Set the IP gateway addresses.*
Value: ###.###.###.###
9-17
Setup, Registration, and User Management > System Menu
Item
IPv6 Settings
IPv6
Description
Set up TCP/IP (IPv6) to connect to the network. The IPv6 setting is available when selecting
[On] for [TCP/IP Setting].
Sets whether to use IPv6.
Value: Off, On
Manual Setting
Manually specify the IP address, prefix length, and gateway address of TCP/IP (IPv6). The
manual setting is available when selecting [On] for TCP/IP (IPv6).
Value
IP Address (Manual): (numbers (128 bit in total) separated by colons)
Prefix Length: 0 to 128
Default Gateway: ###.###.###.###
RA (Stateless)
Select whether or not to use RA (Stateless). The RA (Stateless) settings are available when
selecting [On] for TCP/IP (IPv6).
When selecting [On], [IP Address 1 (to 5)] appears under [IP Address (Stateless)/Prefix
Length].
Value: Off, On
DHCP
Select whether or not to use the DHCP (IPv6) server. The DHCP (IPv6) Settings are available
when selecting [On] for TCP/IP (IPv6).*
Value: Off, On
Protocol Detail
NetBEUI
The table below lists the network related function settings. The network related functions are
available when [TCP/IP Setting] is [On].
Selects whether or not to receive documents using NetBEUI.*
Value: Off, On
LPD
Select whether or not to receive documents using LPD as the network protocol.*
Value: Off, On
SMTP (E-mail TX)
Select whether or not to send e-mail using SMTP.
Value: Off, On
POP3 (E-mail RX)
Select whether or not to receive e-mail using POP3.
Value: Off, On
FTP Client
(Transmission)
Select whether or not to send documents using FTP. When selecting [On], set the FTP Port
Number. Use the FTP default port 21.
Value: Off, On, Port 1 - 65535
FTP Server (Reception)
Select whether or not to receive documents using FTP.*
Value: Off, On
SMB Client
(Transmission)
Select whether or not to send documents using SMB. When selecting [On], set the SMB default
Port Number. Use the SMB default port 139. For Windows Vista, use 445.
Value: Off, On, Port 1 - 65535
LDAP
Select whether or not to use LDAP.
Value: Off, On
SNMP
Select whether or not to communicate using SNMP.*
Value: Off, On
SNMPv3
Select whether or not to communicate using SNMPv3.*
Value: Off, On
HTTP
Select whether or not to communicate using HTTP.*
Value: Off, On
9-18
Setup, Registration, and User Management > System Menu
Item
HTTPS
Description
Select whether or not to communicate using HTTPS. SSL must be set to [On] in SSL on page
9-20.*
Value: Off, On
IPP
Select whether or not to communicate using IPP. When selecting [On], set the IPP default Port
Number. Use the IPP default port 631.*
Value: Off, On, Port 1 - 65535
IPP over SSL
Select whether or not to use IPP over SSL. When selecting [On], set the IPP over SSL default
Port Number. Use the IPP over SSL default port 443. SSL must be set to [On] in SSL on page
9-20.*
Value: Off, On, Port:1 - 65535
Raw Port
Select whether or not to receive documents using Raw Port.*
Value: Off, On
ThinPrint
Select whether or not to use ThinPrint.
Value: Off, On
ThinPrintOverSSL
Select whether or not to use ThinPrintOverSSL. SSL must be set to [On] in SSL on page 9-20.
Value: Off, On
*
After changing the setting, restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON again.
NetWare
Item
NetWare
Description
Select the NetWare network connection. After that, select frame types for NetWare network
from Auto, Ethernet-II, 802.3, 802.2, or SNAP.*
Value
Off, On, Frame Type: Auto, 802.3, Ether-II, 802.2, SNAP
*
After changing the setting, restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON again.
AppleTalk
Item
AppleTalk
Description
Select the Apple Talk network connection.*
Value: Off, On
*
After changing the setting, restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON again.
WSD Scan
Item
WSD Scan
Description
Select whether or not to use WSD Scan.*
Value: Off, On
*
After changing the setting, restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON again.
WSD Print
Item
WSD Print
Description
Select whether or not to use WSD Print.*
Value: Off, On
*
After changing the setting, restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON again.
9-19
Setup, Registration, and User Management > System Menu
Enhanced WSD
Item
Enhanced WSD
Description
Set whether to use Kyocera’s proprietary web services.*
Selecting [Off] will disable the functionality of WIA and TWAIN drivers. If you want to disable
KMnet Viewer functionality, Enhanced WSD, Enhanced WSD (SSL), SNMP and SNMPv3
(refer to Protocol Detail on page 9-18) must be set to [Off].
Value: Off, On
*
After changing the setting, restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON again.
Enhanced WSD (SSL)
Item
Enhanced WSD (SSL)
Description
Set whether to use Kyocera’s proprietary web services over SSL.*
Value: Off, On
*
After changing the setting, restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON again.
IPSec
Item
IPSec
Description
Make this setting when you use IPSec.*
Value: Off, On
*
After changing the setting, restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON again.
Secure Protocol
Item
SSL
Description
Select whether or not to use SSL.*
Value: Off, On
IPP Security
Select the IPP security level. This setup is available when SSL is [On].*
Value: IPP/IPP over SSL, IPPoverSSL only
HTTP Security
Select the HTTP security level. This setup is available when SSL is [On].*
Value: HTTP/HTTPS, HTTPS Only
LDAP Security (Address Book)
LDAP Security (User)
Select the type of encryption according to the type of security employed by the LDAP server.
This setup is available when SSL is [On].*, **
Value: Off, LDAPv3/TLS, LDAP over SSL
*
**
After changing the setting, restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON again.
LDAP must be set to [On] in Protocol Detail on page 9-18.
LAN Interface
Item
LAN Interface
Description
Specify the settings for the LAN interface to be used.*
Value: Auto, 10Base-Half, 10Base-Full, 100Base-Half, 100Base-Full, 1000BASE-T
*
After changing the setting, restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON again.
9-20
Setup, Registration, and User Management > System Menu
Interface Block Setting
This allows you to protect this machine by blocking the interface with external devices such as USB hosts or optional
interfaces.
Item
USB Host
Description
This locks and protects the USB memory slot (A1) or USB port (A2) (USB host).
Value: Unblock, Block
USB Device
This locks and protects the USB interface connector (B1) (USB Device).
Value: Unblock, Block
Optional Interface 1
This locks and protects the optional interface slots (OPT1 or OPT2).
Optional Interface 2
Value: Unblock, Block
RAM Disk Setting
Item
RAM Disk Setting
Description
When optional memory is installed, a RAM disk can be created and its size can be set.
Creating a RAM disk makes it possible to print from a Job Box.
Value
RAM Disk Setting: Off, On
RAM Disk Size: Setting range varies with memory balance settings.
Optional Memory
Item
Optional Memory
Description
When optional memory is installed, select the memory allocation scheme based on the
application in which you are using the equipment.
Value: Printer Priority, Normal, Copy Priority
Date/Timer
Configures settings related to the date and time.
Item
Date/Timer
Description
Set the date and time for the location where you use the machine. If you perform Send as Email, the date and time set here will be displayed on the header.
Value: Year (2000 to 2037), Month (1 to 12), Day (1 to 31), Hour (00 to 23), Minute (00 to 59),
Second (00 to 59)
Date Format
Select the display format of year, month, and date. The year is displayed in Western notation.
Value: Month/Day/Year, Day/Month/Year, Year/Month/Day
Time Zone
Set the time difference from GMT. Choose the nearest listed location from the list.
Auto Panel Reset
If no jobs are run for a certain period of time, automatically reset settings and return to the
default setting. Select to use Auto Panel Reset or not.
Value: Off, On
The time allowed to elapse before the panel is reset is set with the Panel Reset Timer.
Auto Sleep
Set Auto Sleep to automatically enter Sleep Mode after a period of inactivity.
Value: Off, On
Refer to Sleep and Auto Sleep on page 2-21 for Sleep.
The time allowed to elapse until the auto sleep function is activated is set with the Sleep
Timer.
9-21
Setup, Registration, and User Management > System Menu
Item
Sleep Level
Description
Select the Sleep level.
Set the Energy Saver mode to reduce power consumption even more than normal Sleep mode.
Value: Quick Recovery, Energy Saver
NOTE: If the optional Gigabit Ethernet Board is installed, Energy Saver cannot be
specified.
(Detailed settings)
Set whether to use the Energy Saver mode for the following functions individually:
Network
USB Cable
Card Reader
RAM Disk
FAX
Value: Off, On
NOTE: When the machine enters Energy Saver, the data stored in the RAM disk will be
deleted. In addition, the machine does not wake from sleep mode when it receives print
data from a PC connected by USB cable. Also, the ID card cannot be recognized.
Auto Error Clear
If an error occurs during processing, processing stops to wait for the next step to be taken by
the user. In the Auto Error Clear mode, automatically clear the error after a set amount of time
elapses. For details, refer to Responding to Error Messages on page 10-12.
Value: Off, On
Low Power Timer
Set amount of time before entering the Low Power mode.
Value: 1 to 240 minutes (1 minute increments).
Panel Reset Timer
If you select [On] for Auto Panel Reset, set the amount of time to wait before Auto Panel Reset.
Value: 5 to 495 seconds (every five seconds)
NOTE: If you select [Off] for Auto Panel Reset, the time display does not appear.
Sleep Timer
Set amount of time before entering Sleep.
Value: 1 to 240 minutes (1 minute increments)
NOTE: If you select [Off] for Auto Sleep, the time display does not appear.
Interrupt Clear Timer
Set the period after which the machine reverts to Normal mode when it has been set to
Interrupt Copy mode and then left unused.
Value: 5 to 495 seconds (every five seconds)
Error Clear Timer
If you select [On] for Auto Error Clear, set the amount of time to wait before automatically
clearing errors.
Value: 5 to 495 seconds (every five seconds)
NOTE: If you select [Off] for Auto Error Clear, the time display does not appear.
Adjustment/Maintenance
Adjust printing quality and conduct machine maintenance.
Item
Density Adjustment
Copy
Description
Adjust density.
Adjust copy density. Adjustment can be made in 7 levels.
Value: -3 (Lighter), -2, -1, 0 (Normal), 1, 2, 3 (Darker)
Send/Box
Adjust scan density when sending or storing the data in Document Box. Adjustment can be
made in 7 levels.
Value: -3 (Lighter), -2, -1, 0 (Normal), 1, 2, 3 (Darker)
9-22
Setup, Registration, and User Management > System Menu
Item
Background Density Adj.
Copy (Auto)
Description
Darkens or lightens overall background density adjustment.
Darkens or lightens overall background density adjustment during copying. Adjustment can be
made in 7 levels.
Value: -3 (Lighter), -2, -1, 0 (Normal), 1, 2, 3 (Darker)
Send/Box (Auto)
Darkens or lightens overall background density when sending images or storing them in the
Document Box. Adjustment can be made in 7 levels.
Value: -3 (Lighter), -2, -1, 0 (Normal), 1, 2, 3 (Darker)
Toner Save Level (EcoPrint)
Copy
Darkens or lightens overall EcoPrint appearance.
Darkens or lightens overall EcoPrint appearance during copying. Adjustment can be made in
5 levels.
Value: 1 to 5
Printer
Darkens or lightens overall EcoPrint appearance during printing. Adjustment can be made in
5 levels.
Value: 1 to 5
Print Density
Adjust print density. Adjustment can be made in 5 levels.
Value: 1 to 5
Auto Color Correction
This setting allows you to adjust the detection level used by the machine to determine whether
the original is color or black and white during Auto Color Mode. Setting a lower value will result
in more originals being identified as color, while a larger value will tend to increase the number
of originals being identified as black and white.
Value: 5 (B & W), 4, 3, 2, 1 (Color)
Correcting Black Line
Correct fine black lines (black streaks caused by contamination), which may appear on the
copies, when the document processor used.
Value
Off: No correction performed.
On (Low): Correction performed. The reproduction of the image becomes lower when using
Off.
On (High): Correction performed. Select this item if black streak remains after using On (Low).
The reproduction of the image becomes lower when using On (Low).
NOTE: Using Correcting Fine Black Line can impair reproduction of fine characters. It is
recommended to keep the default ([Off]).
Display Brightness
Set the brightness of the touch panel.
Value: 1 (Darker), 2, 3, 4 (Lighter)
9-23
Setup, Registration, and User Management > System Menu
Item
Gray Adjustment
Description
After prolonged use, or from the effects of surrounding temperature or humidity, the hue of
printed color output may shift or color drift may occur. Use this function to correct color settings
when the color of a finished copy does not match the original.
NOTE: To perform gray adjustment, verify that either Letter or A4 paper is loaded into a
cassette.
Procedure
1
2
Press [Start] and print the first pattern. As shown in the illustration, place the printed side down
on the platen.
Press [Start]. The first pattern is read and adjustment begins.
The second pattern is output. Confirm that a number "2" is printed on the pattern. Place the
pattern on the platen in the same way as the first pattern.
Press [Start]. The second pattern is read and adjustment begins.
Turn the main power switch off and on. The adjustment will be completed after restarting the
system.
Drum Refresh 1
Use this mode when images are blurred or smeared. Takes about 90 seconds. Press [Start] to
perform Drum Refresh.
NOTE: Drum Refresh cannot be performed while printing. Execute Drum Refresh after the
printing is done.
Drum Refresh 2
Use this mode when white spots appear on images. Takes about 90 seconds.
To use [Drum Refresh 2], load Ledger or A3 size paper into the multi purpose tray. Press [Start]
to perform Drum Refresh.
When you run [Drum Refresh 2], the machine makes a vibrating sound for about 90 seconds
until drum refreshing is completed. The toner soiling on the ejected paper is normal and does
not indicate a fault.
NOTE: Drum Refresh cannot be performed while printing. Execute Drum Refresh after the
printing is done.
Auto Drum Refresh
Auto Drum Refresh may be executed when the machine is turned on the power or recovered
from the low power mode or sleep mode. Auto Drum Refresh is executed automatically to keep
the best image quality by monitoring its peripheral temperature and humidity.
Value
Short: Perform Auto Drum Refresh as Short (maximum 180 seconds).
Normal: Perform Auto Drum Refresh as Standard (maximum 360 seconds).
Long: Perform Auto Drum Refresh as Long (maximum 450 seconds).
NOTE: When an error state such as condensation is detected, [Normal] and [Long] may
take a maximum of 630 seconds.
DP Adjustment
Adjust scan action of the document processor. Place the adjustment original in the document
processor.
Press [Start] and adjustment begins.
NOTE: Call Service to obtain the adjustment original.
9-24
Setup, Registration, and User Management > User Login Administration
User Login Administration
User login administration specifies how the user access is administered on this machine. Enter correct login user name
and password for user authentication to login.
Access are in three levels - User, Administrator, and Machine Administrator. The security levels can be modified only by
the machine administrator.
First User Login Administration
Follow these steps for the first user login administration. For details about the configuration method, refer to User Login
Settings on page 9-26.
Enable user login administration.
2
Add a user.
3
Log out.
4
The registered user logs in for operations.
GB0723_00
GB0440_00
GB0435_00
1
9-25
Setup, Registration, and User Management > User Login Administration
User Login Settings
1
Display the screen.
Use [
] or [
] to scroll up and down.
2
GB0054_03
1
GB0434_00
3
GB0723_00
NOTE
You can only change the settings by logging in with administrator privileges. Refer to Adding
a User on page 9-30 for the default login user name and password.
Configure the function.
GB0435_00
2
Enabling/Disabling User Login Administration  page 9-27
Local User Authorization  page 9-29
Adding a User  page 9-30
Editing and Deleting Users  page 9-35
Simple Login  page 9-38
Group Authorization  page 9-44
Obtain Network User Property  page 9-48
9-26
Setup, Registration, and User Management > User Login Administration
Enabling/Disabling User Login Administration
This enables user login administration. Select one of the following authentication methods:
Local Authentication
User authentication based on user properties on the local user list stored in the machine.
Network Authentication
User authentication based on Authentication Server. Use a user property stored in Authentication
Server to access the network authentication login page.
1
Display the screen.
1 Referring to User Login Settings on page 9-26, display the screen.
GB0435_00
2
GB0436_00
Select the authentication method.
When selecting [Network Authentication]
Select the server type.
2
GB0438_00
GB0437_00
1
Enter the host name.
2
3
Up to 64 characters can be entered.
Refer to Character Entry Method on page 11-7 for details on entering characters.
9-27
GB0057_24
1
GB0437_00
2
Setup, Registration, and User Management > User Login Administration
Enter a domain name.
2
GB0057_25
GB0437_02
1
3
When selecting [NTLM] or [Kerberos] as the server type, enter a domain name of 256
characters or less.
2
GB0437_01
1
3
GB0439_00
Enter the port number.
When selecting [Account Agency] as the server type, enter the port number.
NOTE
If the login user name and password are rejected, check the following settings.
•
Network Authentication setting of the machine
•
User property of the Authentication Server
•
Date and time setting of the machine and the Authentication Server
If you cannot login because of the setting of the machine, login with any administrator
registered in the local user list and correct the settings. If the server type is [Kerberos], only
domain names entered in uppercase will be recognized.
9-28
Setup, Registration, and User Management > User Login Administration
Local User Authorization
Enables local user authorization. Job use can be prohibited for specific users. Set when adding a user (see page 9-30)
or editing and deleting users (see page 9-35).
1
Display the screen.
1 Referring to User Login Settings on page 9-26, display the screen.
GB0435_00
2
Select [On].
GB0908_00
2
9-29
Setup, Registration, and User Management > User Login Administration
Adding a User
This adds a new user. You can add Up to 100 users (including the default login user name).
The table below explains the user information to be registered.
User Name*
Enter the name displayed on the user list (up to 32 characters).
Login User Name*
Enter the login user name to login (up to 64 characters). The same login user name cannot be
registered.
Login Password
Enter the password to login (up to 16 characters).
Account 1DPH$dd an account where the user belongs. The user, who registered his/her account name, can login
without entering the account ID. Refer to Job Accounting on page 9-50.
E-mail Address
The user can register his/her E-mail address (up to 128 characters). The registered address will be
automatically selected for subsequent operations that need any E-mail function.
Access Level*
Select Administrator or User for user access privileges.
My Panel
Registers settings for individual users. Settings registered here can be applied simply by logging in.
Local Authorization
Restricts the use of the machine by user. Local user authorization must be enabled to use this function
(see page 9-29). The following restriction items are available:
Printer: Select whether or not to reject usage of print functions for the printer.
Copy: Select whether or not to reject usage of copy functions.
Send: Select whether or not to reject usage of the send functions.
FAX Transmission: Select whether or not to reject usage of the FAX transmissions.
Storing in Box: Select whether or not to reject usage of storing in the document boxes.
Storing in Memory: Select whether or not to reject usage of storing in the removable memory.
*
Mandatory at user registration.
NOTE
By default, one of each default user with machine administrator rights and administrator privileges is already stored.
Each user's properties are:
Machine Administrator
•
User Name: DeviceAdmin
•
Login User Name: 25 ppm model - 2500, 30 ppm model - 3000
•
Login Password: 25 ppm model - 2500, 30 ppm model - 3000
•
Access Level: Machine Administrator
Administrator
•
User Name: Admin
•
Login User Name: Admin
•
Login Password: Admin
•
Access Level: Administrator
It is recommended to periodically change the user name, login user name and login password regularly for your
security.
1
Display the screen.
1 Referring to User Login Settings on page 9-26, display the screen.
9-30
Setup, Registration, and User Management > User Login Administration
2
2
2
GB0440_00
GB0435_00
1
Enter the user information.
[User Name]
GB0057_51
1
2
[Login User Name]
GB0057_53
1
2
GB0445_00
[Access Level]
Select the user access privilege.
Check the settings.
Check the settings and change or add information as needed.
[User Name]
2
9-31
3
GB0057_26
1
GB0446_00
3
Setup, Registration, and User Management > User Login Administration
[Login User Name]
2
3
GB0057_28
GB0446_00
1
[Login Password]
2
3
GB0057_29
GB0446_00
1
Enter the same login password twice for confirmation purposes.
[Accounting Name]
Searches by account name.
2
GB0603_00
GB0446_00
1
Allows you to search for an account
name and sorts results.
Displays details for individual account names.
[E-mail Address]
2
3
GB0057_30
GB0446_01
1
[Access Level]
Select the user access privilege.
9-32
GB0443_00
GB0446_01
1
Setup, Registration, and User Management > User Login Administration
[My Panel]
2
GB0749_00
GB0446_01
1
For details on My Panel, refer to My Panel on page 9-34.
[Local Authorization]
2
GB0446
GB0839_00
GB0446_01
1
Use [
Change the limitations as needed.
Register the user.
GB0446_00
4
9-33
] or [
] to scroll up and down.
Setup, Registration, and User Management > User Login Administration
My Panel
Registers settings for individual users. Settings registered here can be applied simply by logging in. Set when Adding a
User (see page 9-30) or Editing and Deleting Users (see page 9-35).
Environments in which shortcut can be configured
Language
Select the language displayed on the touch panel.
Default Screen
Set the screen appearing right after the user logs in (default screen).
Shortcut
Select either [Shared Shortcut] or [Private Shortcut].
[Language]
2
GB0744_00
GB0749_00
1
Use [
] or [
] to scroll up and down.
[Default Screen]
1
GB0745_00
GB0749_00
2
Use [
] or [
] to scroll up and down.
GB0746_00
When [Send] or [FAX] has been selected, sets which screen to use as the default screen.
[Shortcut]
GB0749_00
1
GB0750_00
2
Displays details for individual shortcuts.
9-34
Setup, Registration, and User Management > User Login Administration
Editing and Deleting Users
User properties can be changed and users can be deleted.
1
Display the screen.
1 Referring to User Login Settings on page 9-26, display the screen.
2
GB0435_00
1
Edit or delete a user.
To edit a user
1 Press […] for the user whose settings you wish to edit.
GB0440_00
Searches by user name.
2 Edit the user.
For more information about individual settings, refer to Adding a User on page 9-30.
[User Name]
2
3
GB0057_54
GB0441_00
1
[Login User Name]
2
9-35
3
GB0057_28
1
GB0441_00
2
Setup, Registration, and User Management > User Login Administration
[Login Password]
2
GB0057_29
GB0441_00
1
3
Enter the same login password twice for confirmation purposes.
[Account Name]
Searches by account name.
2
GB0603_00
GB0441_00
1
Allows you to search for an account
name and sorts results.
Displays details for individual account names.
[E-mail Address]
2
3
GB0057_30
GB0441_01
1
[My Panel]
GB0441_01
GB0749_00
2
1
For details on My Panel, refer to My Panel on page 9-34.
[Local Authorization]
2
9-36
GB0839_00
GB0441_01
1
Setup, Registration, and User Management > User Login Administration
When local user authorization is enabled, accesses restrictions.
3 Register the user.
1
GB0441_00
2
To delete
2
1
GB0440_00
3
Select the user you wish to delete and press [(Delete)] (the trash can icon).
NOTE
Also, you can delete the user by selecting the user, press [Menu] and then [Delete].
9-37
Setup, Registration, and User Management > User Login Administration
Simple Login
The simple login function allows users to log in simply by selecting a user name. Users must be registered in advance to
use this functionality.
For details, refer to Adding a User on page 9-30.
Simple Login Settings
Enable simple login.
1
Display the screen.
1 Referring to User Login Settings on page 9-26, display the screen.
GB0435_00
2
2
Enable simple login.
2
Register a User
Register users to use simple login. Up to 20 users can be registered.
The table below explains the user information to be registered.
Name
Set the user name to display on the Simple Login screen.
User
Select which registered users can use simple login.
Password Login
Set whether to require entry of a login password at login.
Icon
Select the icon to display on the Simple Login screen.
1
Display the screen.
1 Referring to User Login Settings on page 9-26, display the screen.
9-38
GB0711_00
GB0710_00
1
Setup, Registration, and User Management > User Login Administration
2
GB0712_00
GB0435_00
1
Enter the user information.
GB0640_00
1 Select the type of user.
2 Select a user.
Local user
Searches by user name.
GB0726_00
2
Allows you to search for a
user and sorts results.
Displays details for individual users.
9-39
GB0710_00
2
3
Setup, Registration, and User Management > User Login Administration
Network user
2
GB0057_31
GB0704_00
1
3
5
GB0057_61
6
7
GB0704_02
GB0704_01
4
Enter the Login User Name and Login Password.
3 Enter the login user name to use with simple login.
GB0057_32
1
2
Check the settings.
Check the settings and change or add information as needed.
[Name]
2
9-40
3
GB0057_62
1
GB0645_00
3
Setup, Registration, and User Management > User Login Administration
[User]
1
GB0740_00
GB0645_00
2
[Password Login]
1
GB0736_00
GB0645_00
2
[Icon]
2
GB0828_00
GB0645_00
1
Use [
] to scroll up and down.
Register the user.
GB0645_00
4
] or [
Editing and Deleting Users
User properties can be changed and users can be deleted.
1
Display the screen.
1 Referring to User Login Settings on page 9-26, display the screen.
9-41
Setup, Registration, and User Management > User Login Administration
2
2
Edit or delete a user.
To edit a user
1 Select the user whose information you wish to edit and press [Menu] and then [Edit].
GB0712_01
2
GB0738_00
3
1
2 Edit the user.
[Name]
2
3
GB0057_32
GB0739_00
1
[User]
1
GB0740_00
GB0739_00
2
[Password Login]
1
9-42
GB0736_01
2
GB0739_00
2
GB0710_00
GB0435_00
1
Setup, Registration, and User Management > User Login Administration
[Icon]
2
GB0828_01
GB0739_00
1
Use [
] or [
] to scroll up and down.
3 Register the user.
1
GB0739_00
2
To delete
2
1
GB0712_01
3
Select the user you wish to delete and press [(Delete)] (the trash can icon).
NOTE
You can also delete a user by selecting the name, pressing [Menu], and then pressing
[Delete].
9-43
Setup, Registration, and User Management > User Login Administration
Group Authorization
Set restrictions of the machine usage by each individual group registered in the authentication server.
NOTE
To use the group authorization settings, [Network Authentication] must be selected for the authentication method and
[NTLM] or [Kerberos] must be selected as the server type in Enabling/Disabling User Login Administration on page 927. Select [On] for LDAP in Protocol Detail on page 9-18.
Group Authorization Settings
Use the group authorization.
1
Display the screen.
1 Referring to User Login Settings on page 9-26, display the screen.
2
GB0435_02
1
Use [
] to scroll up and down.
Select [On].
GB0451_00
2
] or [
GB0450_00
2
Add a Group
Register the groups that is restricted the machine usage. Up to 20 groups can be individually registered. Other users
and groups belong to Others.
Group ID*
Enter the ID displayed on the group list (between 1 and 4294967295).
Group Name
Enter the name displayed on the group list (up to 32 characters).
Access Level
Select Administrator or User for group access privileges.
Printer
Select whether or not to reject usage of print functions for the printer.
Copy
Select whether or not to reject usage of copy functions.
Send
Select whether or not to reject usage of the send functions.
FAX Transmission**
Select whether or not to reject usage of the FAX transmissions.
Storing in Box
Select whether or not to reject usage of storing in the document boxes.
Storing in Memory
Select whether or not to reject usage of storing in the removable memory.
9-44
Setup, Registration, and User Management > User Login Administration
1
Display the screen.
1 Referring to User Login Settings on page 9-26, display the screen.
2
GB0450_01
2
GB0452_00
GB0435_02
1
Enter the group information.
[Group ID]
1
2
GB0458_00
2
[Group Name]
1
GB0057_33
**
For Group ID, specify PrimaryGroupID assigned by ActiveDirectory of Windows. If you are using Windows Server 2008, check Attribute Editor tab of user properties. If you are using Windows Server 2000/2003, check ADSIEdit. ADSIEdit is a support tool included on the installation CD-ROM for Windows Server OS (under \SUPPORT\TOOLS).
This item is displayed when the optional fax is installed.
2
[Access Level]
GB0459_00
*
9-45
3
Setup, Registration, and User Management > User Login Administration
Check the settings.
Check the settings and change or add information as needed.
[Group ID]
1
GB0460_00
2
GB0454_00
1
[Group Name]
2
3
GB0057_63
GB0460_00
1
[Access Level]
1
9-46
GB0455_00
2
GB0460_00
3
Setup, Registration, and User Management > User Login Administration
[Printer], [Copy], [Send], [FAX Transmission], [Storing in Box], [Storing in Memory]
1
GB0456_00
GB0460_00
2
GB0460_02
GB0460_01
Use [
Change the restrictions as needed.
Register the group.
GB0460_00
4
9-47
] or [
] to scroll up and down.
Setup, Registration, and User Management > User Login Administration
Obtain Network User Property
Set the required information to obtain the network user property from the LDAP server.
NOTE
To obtain the network user property from the LDAP server, [Network Authentication] must be selected for the
authentication method and [NTLM] or [Kerberos] must be selected as the server type in Enabling/Disabling User Login
Administration on page 9-27.
Server Name*
Enter the LDAP server name or the IP address (up to 64 characters).
Port
Set the LDAP port number or use the default port 389.
Name 1**
Enter the LDAP Attribute to obtain the user name to be displayed from the LDAP server (up to 32
characters).
Name 2***
E-mail Address****
Enter the LDAP Attribute to obtain the e-mail address from the LDAP server (up to 128 characters).
Search Timeout
Set the amount of time to wait before time-out in seconds (from 5 to 255 seconds).
*
If using Active Directory of Windows, the server name may be same as the server name entered in the network authentication.
** If using Active Directory of Windows, displayName of Attribute may be used as Name 1.
*** Name 2 can be left out. When you assign displayName in Name 1 and department in Name 2, and if the value of displayName
is "Mike Smith" and the value of department is "Sales" in Active Directory of Windows, the user name appears as Mike Smith
Sales.
**** If using Active Directory of Windows, mail of Attribute may be used as E-mail Address.
1
Display the screen.
1 Referring to User Login Settings on page 9-26, display the screen.
2
2
Use [
] to scroll up and down.
Configure the function.
[Server Name]
2
3
Up to 64 characters can be entered.
Refer to Character Entry Method on page 11-7 for details on entering characters.
9-48
GB0057_34
1
GB0692_00
2
] or [
GB0691_00
GB0435_01
1
Setup, Registration, and User Management > User Login Administration
[Port]
GB0439_01
GB0692_02
1
[Name 1] and [Name 2]
2
GB0057_35
GB0692_00
1
3
Up to 32 characters can be entered.
[E-mail Address]
2
GB0057_36
GB0692_01
1
3
Up to 128 characters can be entered.
[Search Timeout]
9-49
2
3
GB0693_00
GB0692_01
1
Setup, Registration, and User Management > Job Accounting
Job Accounting
Job accounting Manages the copy/print count accumulated by individual accounts by assigning an ID to each account.
Job accounting helps the following activities in business organizations.
•
Manageability of up to 100 individual accounts.
•
Availability for account IDs with as many as eight digits (between 0 and 99999999) for security.
•
Integrated management of printing and scanning statistics through the use of an identical account ID.
•
Tracking the print volume for each account and for all accounts combined.
•
Restricting the print counter in one-page increments up to 9,999,999 copies.
•
Resetting the print counter for each account or for all accounts combined.
First Job Accounting Setup
Follow these steps for the first job accounting setup. For details about the configuration method, refer to Job Accounting
Settings on page 9-52.
Enable job accounting.
2
Add an account.
3
Log out.
GB0473_00
GB0462_00
1
9-50
Setup, Registration, and User Management > Job Accounting
Other users login for operations.
GB0725_00
4
9-51
Setup, Registration, and User Management > Job Accounting
Job Accounting Settings
1
Display the screen.
Use [
] or [
] to scroll up and down.
2
3
GB0434_00
GB0054_03
1
GB0723_00
NOTE
You can only change the settings by logging in with administrator privileges.
Configure the function.
GB0461_00
2
Enabling/Disabling Job Accounting  page 9-53
Login/Logout  page 9-54
Adding an Account  page 9-55
Editing and Deleting Accounts  page 9-57
Restricting the Use of the Machine  page 9-59
Counting the Number of Pages Printed  page 9-61
Printing an Accounting Report  page 9-63
Job Accounting Default Setting  page 9-64
Unknown Login User Name Job  page 9-66
9-52
Setup, Registration, and User Management > Job Accounting
Enabling/Disabling Job Accounting
Enable job accounting.
1
Display the screen.
1 Referring to Job Accounting Settings on page 9-52, display the screen.
GB0461_00
2
Enable job accounting.
GB0462_00
2
NOTE
When the display returns to the System Menu default screen, logout is automatically
executed and the screen to enter the Account ID appears. To continue the operation, enter
the Account ID.
9-53
Setup, Registration, and User Management > Job Accounting
Login/Logout
If job accounting is enabled, an account ID entry screen appears each time you use this machine.
Login
Enter the account ID.
GB0725_00
1
If this screen is displayed during operations, enter the account ID.
NOTE
If you entered a wrong character, press the Clear key and enter the account ID again.
If the entered account ID does not match the registered ID, a warning beep will sound and
login will fail. Enter the correct account ID.
By pressing [Check Counter], you can refer to the number of pages printed and the number
of pages scanned.
Log in.
GB0725_01
2
When the screen to enter the login user name and password appears
If user login administration is enabled, the screen to enter the login user name and password
appears. Enter a login user name and password to login. (Refer to Login/Logout on page 312.) If the user has already registered the account information, the account ID entry would be
skipped. (Refer to Adding a User on page 9-30.)
Logout
When the operations are complete, press the Logout key to return to the account ID entry screen.
9-54
Setup, Registration, and User Management > Job Accounting
Adding an Account
This section explains how to add a new account. The following entries are required.
Account Name
Enter the account name (up to 32 characters).
Account ID
Enter the account ID as many as eight digits (between 0 and 99999999).
Restriction
This Prohibits printing/scanning or restricts the number of sheets to load. Refer to Restricting the Use
of the Machine on page 9-59.
NOTE
Any account ID that has already registered cannot be used. Enter any other account ID.
1
Display the screen.
1 Referring to Job Accounting Settings on page 9-52, display the screen.
2
2
Use [
2
] or [
GB0473_00
GB0461_01
1
] to scroll up and down.
Enter the account information.
[Account Name]
GB0057_37
1
2
1
3
2
GB0479_00
[Account ID]
Check the settings.
Check the settings and change or add information as needed.
9-55
Setup, Registration, and User Management > Job Accounting
[Account Name]
2
GB0057_64
GB0480_00
1
3
Refer to Character Entry Method on page 11-7 for details on entering characters.
[Account ID]
GB0480_00
2
3
GB0476_00
1
Restrictions
GB0480_00
2
] or [
] to scroll up and down.
GB0480_01
Use [
For details, refer to Restricting the Use of the Machine on page 9-59.
Register the account.
GB0480_00
4
9-56
GB0474_00
1
Setup, Registration, and User Management > Job Accounting
Editing and Deleting Accounts
This changes the registered account information or deletes the account.
1
Display the screen.
1 Referring to Job Accounting Settings on page 9-52, display the screen.
2
] or [
] to scroll up and down.
GB0461_01
Use [
Edit or delete an account.
To edit an account
1 Press […] for the account name you wish to edit.
GB0473_00
Searches by account name.
Allows you to search for an account name and sorts results.
You can specify an account name by account ID by pressing the Quick No. Search key.
2 Edit the account.
[Account Name]
2
9-57
3
GB0057_64
1
GB0478_00
2
Setup, Registration, and User Management > Job Accounting
[Account ID]
1
GB0476_00
GB0478_00
2
Restriction
GB0478_00
2
] or [
] to scroll up and down.
GB0478_01
Use [
For details, refer to Restricting the Use of the Machine on page 9-59.
3 Register the account.
1
GB0478_00
2
To delete
2
1
GB0473_00
3
Select the account name you wish to delete and press [(Delete)] (the trash can icon).
9-58
GB0474_00
1
3
Setup, Registration, and User Management > Job Accounting
Restricting the Use of the Machine
This section explains how to restrict the use of the machine by account or the number of pages available.
Set when Adding an Account (see page 9-55) or Editing and Deleting Accounts (see page 9-57).
The items that can be restricted differ depending on whether [Individual] or [Total] is selected for Copier/Printer Count on
page 9-64.
Restriction Items
[Individual] selected for Copier/Printer Count
Copy (Total)
Limits the total number of pages used for copying.
Print (Total)
Limits the total number of pages used for printing.
Scan Others)
Limits the number of pages scanned (excludes copying).
FAX TUDQVPLVVLRQ*
*
Limits the number of pages sent by fax.
This item is displayed when the optional fax kit is installed.
[Total] selected for Copier/Printer Count
Print Restriction (Total)
Limits the total number of pages used for copying and printing.
Scan Restriction (Others)
Limits the number of pages scanned (excludes copying).
FAX TX Restriction*
Limits the number of pages sent by fax.
*
Only displayed when the optional fax kit is installed.
Applying Restriction
Off
No restriction given.
Counter Limit
Restricts the print counter in one-page increments up to 9,999,999 pages.
Reject Usage
Restriction is applied.
For details on the machine behaves when the counter has reached the limit of restriction, refer to Apply Limit on page 9-64.
Use [
] or [
] to scroll up and down.
9-59
GB0480_00
GB0480_02
GB0480_03
Select the item to limit.
GB0480_01
1
Setup, Registration, and User Management > Job Accounting
Select a restriction method.
GB0474_00
2
If [Counter Limit] is selected, press [+], [-] or numeric keys to select the number of pages.
9-60
Setup, Registration, and User Management > Job Accounting
Counting the Number of Pages Printed
This counts the number of pages printed. Counts are classified into Total Job Accounting and Each Job Accounting. A
new count can also be started after resetting the count data which was stored for a certain period of time.
Types of the counts are as follows.
Printed Pages
Displays the number of pages copied and printed, and the total number of pages used. You can
also use [by Paper Size], [by Duplex] and [by Combine] to check the number of pages used.
• For copying, you can check the pages used for black and white copying.
• For printing, you can check the pages used for black and white printing.
• You can use [by Paper Size] to check the number of pages used in the paper size set in
Count by Paper Size on page 9-65 as well as the number of pages used in other paper
sizes.
• You can use [by Duplex] to check the number of pages used in Duplex (1-sided) mode,
Duplex (2-sided) mode and the total for both.
• You can use [by Combine] to check the number of pages used in Combine (None) mode,
Combine (2 in 1) mode, Combine (4 in 1) mode and the total for all three.
Displays the number of pages scanned for copying, faxing* and other functions, as well as the
total number of pages scanned.
FAX Transmission Pages*
Displays the number of pages faxed.
FAX Transmission Time*
Displays the total duration of fax transmissions.
This item is displayed when the optional fax kit is installed.
Display the screen.
1 Referring to Job Accounting Settings on page 9-52, display the screen.
2
GB0461_02
1
To count the number of pages for all account, select [Total Job Accounting]. To count the
number of pages by account, select [Each Job Accounting].
Searches by account name.
GB0469_00
*
Scanned Pages
Allows you to search for an account name and sorts results.
To count the number of pages by account name, press […] for the account name whose usage
you wish to view.
9-61
Setup, Registration, and User Management > Job Accounting
GB0464_00
GB0463_00
View the number of pages.
Use [
To reset the counter
2
1
GB0463_00
2
9-62
] or [
] to scroll up and down.
Setup, Registration, and User Management > Job Accounting
Printing an Accounting Report
Total pages counted at all relevant accounts can be printed as an accounting report.
Reports have different formats depending on how the count of copiers and printers is administered.
Copier/Printer Count
Format
When [Total] is selected for Copier/
Printer Count
Print (Total)
Total number of pages used for copying and printing
When [Individual] is selected for Copier/
Printer Count
Copy
Total number of pages used for copying
Print
Total number of pages used for printing
Shared statistics
Scan
Total number of pages scanned
Total number of pages scanned for copying
Total number of pages faxed
Total number of other pages scanned
Fax
Total number of pages received
Total number of pages sent
Total duration of fax transmissions
Other
Total number of duplex pages printed
Total number of 1-sided pages printed
Total number of combine (2 in 1) pages
Total number of combine (4 in 1) pages
Total number of non-combine pages printed
For the count by paper size, the report will be printed by size.
1
Prepare paper.
2
Display the screen.
3
Print reports.
Check that Letter or A4 paper is loaded in the cassette.
Referring to Job Accounting Settings on page 9-52, display the screen.
1
GB0461_00
2
9-63
Setup, Registration, and User Management > Job Accounting
Job Accounting Default Setting
Sets default settings related to job accounting.
Display the screen.
1 Referring to Job Accounting Settings on page 9-52, display the screen.
Use [
] or [
GB0481_00
GB0461_01
2
] to scroll up and down.
Setting Items
Item
Apply Limit
Description
This specifies how the machine behaves when the counter has reached the limit of
restriction.
Value
Immediately*: Job stops when the counter reaches its limit.
Subsequently: Printing/scanning of the job continues but the subsequent job will be
rejected.
Alert Only: Job continues while displaying an alert message.
Copier/Printer Count
You can select how the copying and printing page counts are shown - either the total of
both or each of copying and printing individually. The selection may influence restriction
on the count and count method.
Refer to Restricting the Use of the Machine on page 9-59, Counting the Number of
Pages Printed on page 9-61 and Printing an Accounting Report on page 9-63 for
details.
Value: Total, Individual
9-64
Setup, Registration, and User Management > Job Accounting
Item
Default Counter Limit
Description
When you add a new account, you can change the default restrictions on the number of
pages used.
Refer to Restricting the Use of the Machine on page 9-59.
Value: 1 to 9,999,999 in 1-sheet increments
Count by Paper Size
This counts the number of pages by paper size (e.g. Letter).
Paper size is available in five types, - 1 to 5. These types are specified in accounting
reports.
Refer to Printing an Accounting Report on page 9-63.
In addition to paper size, media type can also be specified (e.g. count the letter-size
color paper used). If no media type is specified, usage is counted for all media types of
that size.
Value
Paper Size 1 to 5
Paper size: A3, A4, A5, B4, B5, Folio, Ledger, Legal, Letter, Statement
Media type: All Media Types, Plain, Transparency, Rough, Vellum, Labels, Recycled,
Preprinted, Bond, Cardstock, Color, Prepunched, Letterhead, Envelope, Thick (106 g/
m² and more), High Quality, Custom 1 to 8
*
The next job will be prohibited in sending or in storing in the box.
9-65
Setup, Registration, and User Management > Job Accounting
Unknown Login User Name Job
This specifies the behavior for handling the jobs sent with unknown login user names or User ID (i.e. unsent IDs). If the
User Login is set to invalid and Job Accounting is set to valid, follow the procedure when the Account ID is unknown.
1
Display the screen.
Use [
] or [
] to scroll up and down.
2
GB0054_03
1
GB0434_00
3
Select the function.
GB0491_00
2
9-66
10
Troubleshooting
This chapter explains the following topics:
Toner Container Replacement ......................................................................................................................... 10-2
Waste Toner Box Replacement ........................................................................................................................ 10-4
Replacing Staples ............................................................................................................................................ 10-5
Cleaning ........................................................................................................................................................... 10-6
Original Cover / Glass Platen ................................................................................................................ 10-6
Document Processor ............................................................................................................................. 10-6
Solving Malfunctions ........................................................................................................................................ 10-8
Responding to Error Messages ..................................................................................................................... 10-12
Clearing Paper Jams ..................................................................................................................................... 10-21
Jam Location Indicators ....................................................................................................................... 10-21
Multi Purpose Tray ............................................................................................................................... 10-22
Inside the Right Cover 1 ...................................................................................................................... 10-22
Cassette 1 ............................................................................................................................................ 10-23
Inside the Right Cover 3 ...................................................................................................................... 10-24
Cassette 2 or 3 .................................................................................................................................... 10-24
Optional Document Finisher ................................................................................................................ 10-25
Optional Document Finisher Staple Jam .............................................................................................. 10-25
Bridge Unit ........................................................................................................................................... 10-26
Document Processor ........................................................................................................................... 10-26
10-1
Troubleshooting > Toner Container Replacement
Toner Container Replacement
When the touch panel displays Toner is empty, replace the toner.
CAUTION
Do not attempt to incinerate the toner container or the waste toner box. Dangerous sparks may cause
burns.
1
Remove the old toner container.
1
2
3
2
Prepare the new toner container.
1
10-2
Troubleshooting > Toner Container Replacement
2
3
3
Install the new toner container.
1
CLICK!
2
NOTE
Return the exhausted toner container and waste toner box to your dealer or service
representative. The collected toner container and waste toner box will be recycled or
disposed in accordance with the relevant regulations
10-3
Troubleshooting > Waste Toner Box Replacement
Waste Toner Box Replacement
When the touch panel displays Check waste toner box, replace the waste toner box.
1
Remove the old waste toner box.
1
2
2
Install the new waste toner box.
1
2
CLICK!
10-4
Troubleshooting > Replacing Staples
Replacing Staples
If a message displays indicating that staples have run out, the staple cartridge holder need to be replenished with
staples.
NOTE
If the Staple Unit runs out of staples, contact your service representative or the place of purchase.
1
Remove the staple cartridge holder.
2
Remove the empty staple cartridge.
NOTE
The staple cartridge can only be removed when it contains no more staples.
3
Insert the new staple cartridge.
4
Re-install the staple cartridge holder.
The staple cartridge holder will click into place when it has been inserted correctly.
10-5
Troubleshooting > Cleaning
Cleaning
Clean the machine regularly to ensure optimum output quality.
Caution
For safety, always unplug the power cord before cleaning the machine.
Original Cover / Glass Platen
Wipe the backside of the original cover, the inside of the document processor and the glass
platen with a soft cloth dampened with alcohol or mild detergent.
NOTE
Do not use organic solvents or other strong chemicals.
Document Processor
If black streaks or dirt appears in copies when using the document processor, clean WKHVOLW
glass with the supplied cleaning cloth.
NOTE
Wipe the slit glasses with the dry accessory cloth. Do not use water, soap or solvents for
cleaning.
1
Wipe the slit glass.
10-6
Troubleshooting > Cleaning
2
Wipe the white guide.
10-7
Troubleshooting > Solving Malfunctions
Solving Malfunctions
The table below provides general guidelines for problem solving.
If a problem occurs with your machine, look into the checkpoints and perform procedures indicated on the following
pages. If the problem persists, contact your Service Representative.
Symptom
Checkpoints
Corrective Actions
Reference
Page
The operation panel does not
respond when the main
power switch is turned on.
Is the machine plugged in?
Plug the power cord into an AC outlet.
2-11
Pressing the Start key does
not produce printouts.
Is there a message on the touch
panel?
Determine appropriate response to the
message and respond accordingly.
10-12
Is the machine in Sleep mode?
Press the Power key to recover the
machine from Sleep mode. The
machine will be ready to copy within 20
seconds.
2-21
Are the originals loaded correctly?
When placing originals on the platen,
place them face-down and align them
with the original size indicator plates.
3-7
When placing originals in the
document processor, place them faceup.
3-9
—
Check that the application software is
correctly operated.
—
Is the paper damp?
Replace the paper with new paper.
3-2
If you experience frequent problems,
turn the cassette heater switch on.
2-4
Select the correct density level.
3-49
When changing the default density
level, adjust the density manually and
choose the desired level.
9-22
Is the toner distributed evenly within
the toner container?
Shake the toner container from side to
side about several times.
10-2
Is there a message indicating the
addition of toner?
Replace the toner container.
10-2
Is EcoPrint mode enabled?
Disable EcoPrint mode.
4-15
—
Make sure the paper type setting is
correct the paper being used.
9-8
Have you adjusted the density?
Select the correct density level.
3-49
When changing the default density
level, adjust the density manually and
choose the desired level.
9-22
Blank sheets are ejected.
Faint printing
Have you adjusted the density?
Printouts are too dark.
Printouts have a moire
pattern (dots grouped
together in patterns and not
aligned uniformly).
Is the original a printed photograph?
Set the image quality to [Photo].
3-51
Printouts are not clear.
Did you choose appropriate image
quality for the original?
Select appropriate image quality.
3-51
10-8
Troubleshooting > Solving Malfunctions
Symptom
Checkpoints
Corrective Actions
Reference
Page
Printouts are dirty.
Is the platen or the document
processor dirty?
Clean the platen or the document
processor.
10-6
Printouts are fuzzy.
Is the machine being used in very
humid conditions?
Use in an environment that has
suitable humidity.
1-3
—
If you experience frequent problems,
turn the cassette heater switch on.
2-4
—
Run [Drum Refresh 1].
9-24
Are the originals placed correctly?
When placing originals on the platen,
align them with the original size
indicator plates.
3-7
When placing originals in the
document processor, align the original
width guides securely before placing
the originals.
3-8
Is the paper loaded correctly?
Check the position of the paper width
guides.
3-2
—
Perform center line adjustment. For
more information about how to do so,
contact your service representative.
—
Is the paper loaded correctly?
Load the paper correctly.
3-2
Is the paper of the supported type? Is it
in good condition?
Remove the paper, turn it over, and
reload it.
3-2
Is the paper curled, folded or wrinkled?
Replace the paper with new paper.
3-2
Are there any loose scraps or jammed
paper in the machine?
Remove any jammed paper.
10-21
Is the paper damp?
Replace the paper with new paper.
3-2
If you experience frequent problems,
turn the cassette heater switch on.
2-4
Is the paper set in a proper
orientation?
Change the orientation in which the
paper is positioned.
—
Is the machine plugged in?
Plug the power cord into an AC outlet.
2-11
Is the machine powered on?
Turn on the main power switch.
2-12
Is the printer cable or network cable
connected?
Connect the correct printer cable or
network cable securely.
2-10
Was the machine powered on before
the printer cable was connected?
Power on the machine after
connecting the printer cable.
2-10
Is the print job paused?
Resume printing.
8-3
Documents are printed
improperly.
Are the application software settings at
the PC set properly?
Check that the printer driver and
application software settings are set
properly.
—
While the operation panel
was being used, the keys
locked up and do not respond
when pressed.
Is the operation panel locked?
Check the panel lock setting in
COMMAND CENTER and change the
setting if necessary.
KYOCERA
COMMAND
CENTER
Operation
Guide
Images are skewed.
Paper often jams.
Printouts are wrinkled.
Cannot print.
10-9
Troubleshooting > Solving Malfunctions
Symptom
Cannot print with USB
memory.
Checkpoints
Corrective Actions
Reference
Page
Is the USB host blocked?
Select Unblock in the USB host
settings.
9-21
Check that the USB memory is
securely plugged into the machine.
—
—
Have you selected 200×100dpi Normal
or 200×400dpi Super for the scan
resolution?
Select a scan resolution other than
200×100dpi Normal or 200×400dpi
Super when sending an image.
3-50
Clean the slit glass.
10-6
Check the operation panel for toner.
If the Toner is empty message is
displayed, install a new toner
container.
10-2
Dirt on the top edge or back
of the paper
Check the paper chute and the ramp.
Open the right cover and check for
toner on the paper ramp inside the
paper transfer unit. Clean the paper
ramp using a soft, dry, lint-free cloth.
—
Part of the image is
periodically faint or blurred.
Have the developer unit and drum unit
been loaded properly?
Load the developer unit and drum unit
properly.
—
Is the right cover completely closed?
Close the right cover.
—
—
Run [Drum Refresh 1].
9-24
—
If you experience frequent problems,
turn the cassette heater switch on.
2-4
—
Run [Drum Refresh 2].
9-24
Set Prevent Bleed-through to [On].
3-54
USB memory not recognized.
When displaying an image
sent from the machine on the
PC, an image size is shrunk
vertically or horizontally.
Black or white vertical streaks,s the slit glass dirty?
White spots appear on
image.
Print on the back of the sheet
is visible on the front.
10-10
Troubleshooting > Solving Malfunctions
Symptom
Checkpoints
Corrective Actions
Reference
Page
Cannot send.
Is the network cable connected?
Connect the correct network cable
securely.
2-10
(When using PC sending
[SMB])
Have the network settings for the
equipment been configured properly?
Configure the TCP/IP settings
properly.
9-17
Have the folder sharing settings been
configured properly?
Check sharing settings and access
privileges under the folder properties.
6-7
Has the SMB protocol been set to
[On]?
Set the SMB protocol setting to [On].
2-23
Has the [Host Name] been entered
properly?*
Check the name of the computer to
which data is being sent.
6-5
Has the [Path] been entered properly?
Check the share name for the shared
folder.
6-10
Has the [Login User Name] been
entered properly?*,**
Check the domain name and login
user name.
6-19
Has the same domain name been
used for the [Host Name] and [Login
User Name]?
Delete the domain name and
backslash ("\") from the [Login User
Name].
6-19
Has the [Login Password] been
entered properly?
Check the login password.
6-19
Have exceptions for Windows Firewall
been configured properly?
1 Select Control Panel on the Start
6-11
menu and open Windows Firewall.
2 Select the Exceptions tab and
6-14
select File and Printer Sharing.
Windows Vista:
1 From the Start menu, select Control
Panel, System and Security (or
Security Center), and then Check
Firewall Status (or Windows
Firewall).
If the User Account Control dialog
box appears, click the Continue
button.
2 Click the Exceptions tab and then
the Add port... button.
3 Enter any name in "Name"
(example: Scan to SMB). Enter "139"
in "Port Number". Select TCP for
"Protocol".
4 Click the OK button.
*
**
Do the time settings for the equipment,
domain server, and data destination
computer differ?
Set the equipment, domain server, and
data destination computer to the same
time.
—
Is the touch panel displaying Send
error.?
Refer to Responding to Send Error.
10-18
You can also enter a full computer name as the host name (for example, pc001.abcdnet.com).
You can also enter login user names in the following formats:
Domain_name/user_name (for example, abcdnet/james.smith)
User_name@domain_name (for example, james.smith@abcdnet)
10-11
Troubleshooting > Responding to Error Messages
Responding to Error Messages
If the touch panel displays any of these messages, follow the corresponding procedure.
A
Error Message
Acceptable staple count
exceeded.*
Add the following paper in
cassette #.
Checkpoints
Corrective Actions
Is the acceptable staple count
exceeded? For details, refer to
Document Finisher (option) on
page 11-21.
Press [Continue] to print without
stapling.
Is the indicated cassette out of
paper?
Load paper.
Reference
Page
—
Press [Cancel] to cancel the job.
3-3
Press [Paper Selection] to select the
other paper source.
Press [Continue] to print on the paper in
the currently selected paper source.
Add the following paper in multi
purpose tray.
Is the paper of the selected size
loaded in the multi purpose tray?
Load paper.
3-5
Press [Paper Selection] to select the
other paper source.
Press [Continue] to print on the paper in
the currently selected paper source.
*
When Auto Error Clear is set to [On], processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time elapses.
B
Error Message
Box limit exceeded.*
*
Checkpoints
Corrective Actions
—
Document box is full, and no further
storage is available; Job is canceled.
Press [End]. Try to perform the job again
after printing or deleting data from the
Document box.
Reference
Page
—
When Auto Error Clear is set to [On], processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time elapses.
C
Error Message
Cannot connect to Authentication
Server.*
Cannot duplex print on the
following paper.*
Checkpoints
Corrective Actions
Reference
Page
—
Set machine time to match the server’s
time.
9-21
—
Check the domain name.
9-25
—
Check the host name.
9-25
—
Check the connection status with the
server.
—
Did you select a paper size/
media type that cannot be duplex
printed?
Press [Paper Selection] to select the
available paper.
4-8
10-12
Press [Continue] to print without using
Duplex function.
Troubleshooting > Responding to Error Messages
Error Message
Cannot offset the following
paper.*
Checkpoints
Corrective Actions
Did you select a paper size/
media type that cannot be offset?
Press [Paper Selection] to select the
available paper.
Reference
Page
3-42
Press [Continue] to print without using
Offset function.
Cannot print the specified
number of copies.*
–
Only one copy is available due to
processing too many jobs in parallel.
—
Press [Continue] to continue printing.
Press [Cancel] to cancel the job.
Cannot process this job.*
—
This job is canceled because it is
restricted by User Authorization or Job
Accounting. Press [End].
—
Cannot staple at the specified
position.
Have you selected a position that
cannot be stapled?
Press [Paper Selection] to select the
available paper.
—
Press [Continue] to print without using
Staple function.
Cannot staple the following
paper.*
Did you select a paper size/type
that cannot be stapled?
Press [Paper Selection] to select the
available paper.
—
Press [Continue] to print without using
Staple function.
Cassette # failure.
—
Contact your Service Representative.
—
Press the System Menu/Counter key,
[Adjustment/Maintenance], [Service
Setting] and then [Enable Repaired
Unit]. Press [Execute] to perform Enable
Repaired Unit.
Check the document processor.
Check waste toner box.
Is the document processor
open?
Close the document processor.
—
Is the top cover of the document
processor open?
Close the top cover of the document
processor.
—
Is the waste toner box full?
Replace the waste toner box.
10-4
The waste toner box is not installed
correctly. Set it correctly.
10-4
Check waste toner box.
*
When Auto Error Clear is set to [On], processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time elapses.
E
Error Message
Error occurred at cassette #.
Checkpoints
Corrective Actions
—
Remove the indicated cassette. Press
[Next >] to follow the instructions.
Reference
Page
—
F
Error Message
Checkpoints
Corrective Actions
Reference
Page
Failed to specify Job
Accounting.*
—
The job is canceled. Press [End].
—
Failed to store job retention data.
—
The job is canceled. Press [End].
—
10-13
Troubleshooting > Responding to Error Messages
Error Message
Finisher failure.
Checkpoints
Corrective Actions
—
Contact your Service Representative.
Reference
Page
—
Press the System Menu/Counter key,
[Adjustment/Maintenance], [Service
Setting] and then [Reset Disable
Function Mode]. Press [Execute] to
perform Reset Disable Function Mode.
Finisher tray is full of paper.
*
Is the acceptable storage
capacity exceeded for the
document finisher tray?
Remove paper from the document
finisher tray.
—
When Auto Error Clear is set to [On], processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time elapses.
H
Error Message
High temperature. Adjust room
temp.
Checkpoints
Corrective Actions
—
Adjust the temperature and the humidity
of your room.
Reference
Page
1-3
I
Error Message
Checkpoints
Corrective Actions
Reference
Page
Incorrect account ID.*
—
The Account ID does not match. Check
the registered Account ID.
—
Incorrect Login User Name or
Password.*
—
Enter correct login user name or
password.
—
Inner tray is full of paper.
—
Remove paper from the inner tray and
press [Continue].
—
*
When Auto Error Clear is set to [On], processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time elapses.
J
Error Message
*
Checkpoints
Corrective Actions
Reference
Page
Job Accounting restriction
exceeded.*
Is the acceptable printing count
restricted by Job Accounting
exceeded?
The printing count exceeded the
acceptable count restricted by Job
Accounting. Cannot print any more. This
job is canceled. Press [End].
—
Job separator tray is full of paper.
Is the maximum capacity of the
job separator exceeded?
Take some paper out of the job
separator. Printing then resumes.
—
When Auto Error Clear is set to [On], processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time elapses.
10-14
Troubleshooting > Responding to Error Messages
K
Error Message
KPDL error.*
Checkpoints
Corrective Actions
—
PostScript error has occurred.
Reference
Page
—
The job is canceled. Press [End].
*
When Auto Error Clear is set to [On], processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time elapses.
L
Error Message
Low temperature. Adjust room
temp.
Checkpoints
Corrective Actions
—
Adjust the temperature and the humidity
of your room.
Reference
Page
1-3
M
Error Message
Checkpoints
Corrective Actions
Reference
Page
Machine failure.
—
Internal error has occurred. Make a note
of the error code displayed on the touch
panel, and contact your Service
Representative.
—
Maximum number of scanned
pages.
Is the acceptable scanning count
exceeded?
Only one copy of the scanned pages is
available.
—
Press [Continue] to print, send or store
the scanned pages.
Press [Cancel] to cancel printing,
sending or storing.
Memory card error.
—
Job is canceled. Press [End].
—
Memory is full.*
—
Unable to continue the job as the
memory is used up.
—
Press [Continue] to print the scanned
pages. The print job cannot be
processed completely.
Press [Cancel] to cancel the job.
—
*
The process cannot be performed due
to insufficient memory. If only [End] is
available, press [End]. The job will be
canceled.
When Auto Error Clear is set to [On], processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time elapses.
10-15
—
Troubleshooting > Responding to Error Messages
P
Error Message
Checkpoints
Corrective Actions
Reference
Page
Paper is left.
—
Remove paper from the document
finisher.
—
Paper jam.
—
If a paper jam occurs, the machine will
stop and the location of the jam will be
indicated on the touch panel. Leave the
machine on and follow the instruction to
remove the jammed paper.
10-21
Print overrun.
—
Warning. Low printer memory. The job
was paused. Press [Continue] to re-start
the job.
—
R
Error Message
Checkpoints
Corrective Actions
Reference
Page
RAM disk error.*
—
Job is canceled. Press [End].
—
Removable memory error.*
—
This job is canceled. Press [End].
—
Removable Memory is full.*
—
This job is canceled. Press [End].
—
Remove originals in the
document processor.
Are there any originals left in the
document processor?
Remove originals from the document
processor.
—
Replace all originals and press
[Continue].
—
Remove originals from the document
processor, put them back in their original
order, and place them again. Press
[Continue] to resume printing.
—
Press [Cancel] to cancel the job.
Replace MK.
—
Replacement of the parts in the
maintenance kit is necessary at every
300,000 pages of printing and requires
professional servicing. Contact your
Service Representative.
—
Replace the toner container to
our specified toner container.
—
Install our genuine product that is
specified for this machine.
10-2
*
When Auto Error Clear is set to [On], processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time elapses.
S
Error Message
Checkpoints
Corrective Actions
Reference
Page
Scanner memory is full.*
—
Scanning cannot be performed due to
insufficient memory of scanner. Only
one copy of the scanned pages is
available. Press [Continue] to print,
send or store the scanned pages. Press
[Cancel] to cancel the printing job.
—
Send error.*
—
An error has occurred during
transmission.Refer to Responding to
Send Error for the error code and
corrective actions.
10-18
10-16
Troubleshooting > Responding to Error Messages
Error Message
Checkpoints
Corrective Actions
Reference
Page
Set cassette.
Have the paper width guide and
paper length guide been loaded
properly?
Load the paper width guide and paper
length guide properly so that there is no
space between the guides and the
paper.
3-3
Staple is empty.*
Has any of the document finisher
run out of staples?
If the staples are depleted, the machine
will stop and the location of staple
depletion will be indicated on the touch
panel.
10-5
Leave the machine on and follow the
instruction to replace the staple case.
Press [Continue] to print without
stapling.
Press [Cancel] to cancel the job.
Staple jam.
—
If a staple jam occurs, the machine will
stop and the location of the jam will be
indicated on the touch panel.
10-25
Leave the machine on and follow the
instruction to remove the jammed
staple.
System error.
*
—
System error has occurred.Follow the
instructions on the touch panel.
—
When Auto Error Clear is set to [On], processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time elapses.
T
Error Message
Checkpoints
Corrective Actions
Reference
Page
The cover is open.
Is there any cover which is
open?
Close the cover indicated on the touch
panel.
—
The phone receiver is off the
hook.
—
Put down the receiver.
—
The slit glass requires cleaning.
—
Clean the slit glass using the cleaning
cloth supplied with the document
processor.
10-6
Toner is empty.
–
Replace the toner container.
10-2
Toner is running out.
—
It is almost time to replace the toner
container. Obtain a new toner container.
—
U
Error Message
Unknown Toner Installed. PC
Checkpoints
Corrective Actions
Is the unauthorized product
installed?
10-17
Install our genuine product that is
specified for this machine.
Reference
Page
—
Troubleshooting > Responding to Error Messages
W
Error Message
Warning low memory.
Checkpoints
Corrective Actions
—
Job cannot be started. Try again later.
Reference
Page
—
Responding to Send Error
Error
Code
1101
1102
Error Message
Corrective Actions
Reference
Page
Failed to send the e-mail.
Check the host name of the SMTP server on the COMMAND
CENTER.
2-24
Failed to send via FTP.
Check the host name of FTP.
6-20
Failed to send via SMB.
Check the host name of SMB.
6-19
Failed to send via SMB.
Check the SMB settings.
6-20
• Login user name and login password
NOTE: If the sender is a domain user, specify the domain
name.
• Host name
• Path
Failed to send the e-mail.
Check the followings on the COMMAND CENTER.
2-24
• SMTP login user name and login password
• POP3 login user name and login password
Failed to send via FTP.
Check the FTP settings.
6-20
• Login user name and login password
NOTE: If the sender is a domain user, specify the domain
name.
• Path
• Folder share permissions of the recipient
1103
Failed to send via SMB.
Check the SMB settings.
6-20
• Login user name and login password
NOTE: If the sender is a domain user, specify the domain
name.
• Path
• Folder share permissions of the recipient
Failed to send via FTP.
Check the FTP settings.
6-20
• Path
• Folder share permissions of the recipient
1104
Failed to send the e-mail.
Check the e-mail address.
6-18
NOTE: If the address is rejected by the domain, you cannot
send the e-mail.
Failed to send via SMB.
Select [On] of the SMB settings on the COMMAND CENTER.
Failed to send the e-mail.
Select [On] of the SMTP settings on the COMMAND CENTER.
Failed to send via FTP.
Select [On] of the FTP settings on the COMMAND CENTER.
1106
Failed to send the e-mail.
Check the sender address of SMTP on the COMMAND
CENTER.
2-24
1131
Failed to send via FTP.
Select [On] of the secure protocol settings on the COMMAND
CENTER.
2-24
1105
10-18
2-24
Troubleshooting > Responding to Error Messages
Error
Code
1132
Error Message
Failed to send via FTP.
Corrective Actions
Check the followings of the FTP server.
Reference
Page
2-24
• Is FTPS available?
• Is the encryption available?
2101
Failed to send via SMB.
Check the network and SMB settings.
Failed to send via FTP.
Check the network and FTP settings.
2-24
• The network cable is connected.
• The hub is not operating properly.
• The server is not operating properly.
• Host name and IP address
• Port number
Failed to send the e-mail.
Check the network and COMMAND CENTER.
• The network cable is connected.
• The hub is not operating properly.
• POP3 server name of the POP3 user
• SMTP server name
2102
Failed to send via FTP.
Check the followings of the FTP server.
—
• Is FTP available?
2103
• The server is not operating properly.
Failed to send the e-mail.
Check the network.
• The network cable is connected.
• The hub is not operating properly.
• The server is not operating properly.
2201
2202
Failed to send the e-mail.
Check the network.
Failed to send via FTP.
• The network cable is connected.
Failed to send via SMB.
• The hub is not operating properly.
Failed to send the e-mail.
—
• The server is not operating properly.
Failed to send via FTP.
2203
Failed to send via FTP.
Failed to send via SMB.
2231
Failed to send via FTP.
2204
Failed to send the e-mail.
Check the e-mail size limit of the SMTP settings on the
COMMAND CENTER.
2-24
3101
Failed to send the e-mail.
Check the authentication methods of both the sender and the
recipient.
—
Failed to send via FTP.
Check the network.
• The network cable is connected.
• The hub is not operating properly.
• The server is not operating properly.
3201
Failed to send the e-mail.
Check the SMTP user authentication method of the recipient.
10-19
—
Troubleshooting > Responding to Error Messages
Error
Code
0007
4201
4701
Error Message
—
Corrective Actions
Turn the main power switch off and back on. If this error occurs
several times, make a note of the displayed error code and
contact your service representative.
5101
5102
5103
5104
7101
7102
7103
720f
10-20
Reference
Page
2-12
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
Clearing Paper Jams
If a paper jam occurs, the touch panel will display Paper Jam. and the machine will stop. Refer to these procedures to
remove the jammed paper.
How to read the screen
Displays the processing
method.
GE0001_00
Displays the current
step.
Puts the current step on hold.
Returns to the
previous step.
Advances to the next
step.
Jam Location Indicators
Detailed paper jam positions are as follows. Refer to the indicated page number to remove the paper jam.
No.
9
6
6
7
8
2 2
2
1
3
5
4
5
Paper Jam Message
Reference Page
1
Clear the paper jammed in the multi purpose tray.
10-22
2
Clear the paper jammed in right cover 1.
10-22
3
Clear the paper jammed in cassette 1.
10-23
4
Clear the paper jammed in right cover 3.
10-24
5
Clear the paper jammed in cassette 2.
10-24
Clear the paper jammed in cassette 3.
10-24
6
Clear the paper jammed in the finisher.
10-25
7
Clear the staple jammed in the finisher.
10-25
8
Clear the paper jammed in the bridge unit.
10-26
9
Clear the paper jammed in the document processor.
10-26
Precautions with Paper Jams
•
Do not reuse jammed papers.
•
If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine.
•
Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming.
•
Discard paper that has jammed in the optional document finisher. A page affected by a paper jam will be printed
again.
Caution
The fixing unit is extremely hot. Take sufficient care when working in this area, as there is a danger of
getting burned.
10-21
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
Multi Purpose Tray
Follow the steps below to clear paper jams in the multi purpose tray.
Inside the Right Cover 1
Follow the steps below to clear paper jams inside the right cover 1.
1
2
Caution
The fixing unit is extremely hot. Take sufficient care when working in this area, as
there is a danger of getting burned.
10-22
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
3
Cassette 1
Follow the steps below to clear paper jams in cassette 1.
10-23
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
Inside the Right Cover 3
Follow the steps below to clear paper jams inside the right cover 3.
1
2
Cassette 2 or 3
Follow the steps below to clear paper jams in cassette 2 or 3.
10-24
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
Optional Document Finisher
Follow the steps below to clear paper jams in the optional document finisher.
1
2
Optional Document Finisher Staple Jam
Follow the steps below to clear staple jams in the optional document finisher.
1
2
10-25
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
3
Bridge Unit
Follow the steps below to clear paper jams in the bridge unit.
Document Processor
Follow the steps below to clear paper jams in the document processor.
1
10-26
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
2
3
10-27
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
10-28
11
Appendix
This chapter explains the following topics:
Optional Equipment .......................................................................................................................................... 11-2
Overview of Optional Equipment ............................................................................................................ 11-2
Paper Feeder (single cassette) ............................................................................................................... 11-3
Paper Feeder (double cassette) ............................................................................................................. 11-3
Document Finisher .................................................................................................................................. 11-3
FAX Kit .................................................................................................................................................... 11-3
Expansion Memory ................................................................................................................................. 11-3
Card Authentication Kit ........................................................................................................................... 11-4
Gigabit Ethernet Board ........................................................................................................................... 11-5
Optional Function .................................................................................................................................... 11-5
Character Entry Method .................................................................................................................................... 11-7
Paper .............................................................................................................................................................. 11-10
Basic Paper Specifications ................................................................................................................... 11-11
Choosing the Appropriate Paper .......................................................................................................... 11-11
Special Paper ........................................................................................................................................ 11-14
Specifications .................................................................................................................................................. 11-18
Machine ................................................................................................................................................ 11-18
Printer ................................................................................................................................................... 11-19
Scanner ................................................................................................................................................ 11-20
Document Processor ............................................................................................................................ 11-20
Paper Feeder (single cassette) (option) ............................................................................................... 11-20
Paper Feeder (double cassette) (option) .............................................................................................. 11-21
Document Finisher (option) .................................................................................................................. 11-21
Environmental Specifications ................................................................................................................ 11-22
Glossary .......................................................................................................................................................... 11-23
11-1
Appendix > Optional Equipment
Optional Equipment
Overview of Optional Equipment
The following optional equipment is available for the machine.
Card Authentication Kit
Document Finisher
Gigabit Ethernet Board
Paper Feeder (double cassette)
FAX Kit
Expansion Memory
11-2
Paper Feeder (single cassette)
Appendix > Optional Equipment
Paper Feeder (single cassette)
An additional cassette identical to the machine’s cassettes can be installed in the machine. Paper capacity and loading
method are the same as Cassettes 1.
Paper Feeder (double cassette)
Two additional cassettes identical to the machine’s cassettes can be installed in the machine. Paper capacity and
loading method are the same as Cassettes 1.
Document Finisher
The document finisher holds a large quantity of finished copies. The finisher offers a convenient means of sorting.
Sorted finished copies may also be stapled. For further details, refer to the document finisher Operation Guide.
FAX Kit
By installing the FAX kit, fax send/receive is enabled. Also, it is possible to use it as a network fax, by using it with a
computer. For further details, refer to Fax Kit Operation Guide.
Expansion Memory
To expand the printer memory for more complex print jobs and faster print speed, you can plug in optional memory
module (dual in line memory module) in the memory slot provided on the main controller board. You can select
additional memory module from 256, 512 or 1024 MB. The maximum memory size is 1536 MB.
Precautions for Handling the Memory Module
Correct
Incorrect
To protect electronic parts, discharge static electricity from your body by touching a water pipe
(faucet) or other large metal object before handling the memory module. Or, wear an antistatic
wrist strap, if possible, when you install the memory module.
Installing the Memory Module
1
Power off.
Turn off the machine and disconnect the power cord and interface cable.
11-3
Appendix > Optional Equipment
2
Remove the covers.
3
Install the memory module.
1 Remove the memory module from its package.
2 With the memory connection terminal pointing toward the socket, align the cut-out part with
the socket terminal and insert directly in at an angle.
IMPORTANT
Before inserting a memory module in the machine, make sure that the machine is
switched off.
3 Carefully press the inserted memory down and into the machine.
4 Reinstall the covers.
Removing the Memory Module
To remove a memory module, remove the right cover and the memory slot cover from the machine. Then, carefully push
out the two socket clamps. Ease the memory module out of the socket to remove.
Verifying the Expanded Memory
To verify that the memory module is working properly, test it by printing a status page.
Refer to Report on page 9-5.
Card Authentication Kit
User login administration can be performed using IC cards. To do so, it is necessary to register IC card information on
the previously registered local user list. For more information about how to register this information, refer to the IC Card
Authentication Kit Operation Guide.
11-4
Appendix > Optional Equipment
Gigabit Ethernet Board
The Gigabit Ethernet Board provides a high-speed connection for the Gigabit-per-second interface. Since the kit was
designed to work with TCP/IP, NetWare, NetBEUI, and AppleTalk protocols, in the same way as the main unit, it fulfills
the network printing demands on Windows, Macintosh, and UNIX environments. This expansion kit is also compatible
with ThinPrint.
Optional Function
You can use the optional applications installed on this machine.
Overview of the Applications
The applications listed below are installed on this machine. You can use these applications for a limited period on a trial
basis.
UG-33 (ThinPrint) (This application can only be activated in Europe.)
This application allows print data to be printed directly without a print driver.
NOTE
Restrictions such as the number of times the application can be used during the trial period differ depending on the
application.
Starting Application Use
Use the procedure below to start using an application.
NOTE
If user login administration is disabled, the user authentication screen appears. Enter your login user name and
password and then press [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges. Refer to Adding a User on
page 9-30 for the default login user name and password.
Display the screen.
Use [
] or [
] to scroll up and down.
2
1
GB0054_02
3
GB0511_01
1
11-5
Appendix > Optional Equipment
Start using an application.
1 Select the desired application and press [Activate].
GB0557_00
1
2
Displays details for individual applications.
2 Select [Official] and enter the license key using the numeric keys.
2
3
GB0609_00
1
GB0608_00
2
4
Some applications do not require you to enter a license key.
To use the application as a trial, select [Trial].
IMPORTANT
If you change the date/time while using an application, you will no longer be able to
use the application
11-6
Appendix > Character Entry Method
Character Entry Method
To enter characters for a name, use the on-display keyboard in the touch panel following the steps as explained below.
NOTE
QWERTY, QWERTZ and AZERTY are available as keyboard layouts the same as a PC keyboard. Press the System
Menu/Counter key, [Common Settings] and then [Keyboard Layout] to choose desired layout. QWERTY layout is
used here as an example. You may use another layout following the same steps.
Entry Screens
Lower-case Letter Entry Screen
4
3
5
6
7
1
2
8
9
GB0057_E01
10
No.
11
12
Display/Key
Description
1
Display
Displays entered characters.
2
Keyboard
Press the character to enter.
3
[ABC] / [Symbol]
Select the characters that are entered. To enter symbols or numbers,
select [Symbol].
4
[A/a] / [a/A]
Press to switch between upper case and lower case.
5
Cursor Key
Press to move the cursor on the display.
6
[Input] / [Limit] Display
Displays maximum number of characters and the number of
characters entered.
7
Delete Key
Press to delete a character to the left of the cursor.
8
Space Key
Press to insert a space.
9
Enter Key
Press to enter a line break.
10
[Cancel]
Press to cancel entered characters and return to the screen before
the entry was made.
11
[< Back]
Press to return to the previous screen.
12
[OK] / [Next >]
Press to save the entered characters and move to the next screen.
11-7
Appendix > Character Entry Method
Upper-case Letter Entry Screen
GB0057_E02
Number/Symbol Entry Screen
13
GB0057_E03
No.
13
Display/Key
[]/[]
Description
To enter a number or symbol not shown in the keyboard, press the
cursor key and scroll the screen to view other numbers or symbols to
enter.
11-8
Appendix > Character Entry Method
Entering Characters
Follow the steps below to enter ‘List A-1’ for an example.
1
Enter 'List', (space).
1, 3
8
2
6
7
GB0057_E11
GB0057_E12
5
4
To shift from lower case to upper case letters, press [a/A]. To shift from upper case to lower
case letters, press [A/a].
2
Enter 'A-1'.
2
GB0057_E13
3
To enter numbers or symbols, press [ABC] to display [Symbol].
Register the characters you entered.
GB0057_E14
3
Press [Next>]. The entered characters are registered.
11-9
GB0057_E14
4
1
Appendix > Paper
Paper
This section explains the paper sizes and types that can be used in the paper source.
Cassettes
Supported types
Plain paper (52 to 163 g/m²)
Recycled paper (52 to 163 g/m²)
Supported paper sizes
Ledger, Letter-R, Letter, Legal, Statement-R, Oficio II, A3, A4-R,
A4, A5-R, B4, B5-R, B5, Folio, 216 × 340 mm, 8K, 16K-R, 16K
No. of sheets
500 (80 g/m²)
Multi Purpose tray
Supported types
Plain paper (52 to 256 g/m²)
Supported paper sizes
Recycled paper (52 to 256 g/m²)
Letter-R, Letter, Statement-R, Executive, A4-R, A4, A5-R, A6-R,
B5-R, B5, B6-R, Folio, 16K-R, 16K
Colored paper (52 to 256 g/m²)
Other sizes:
No. of sheets
100 (80 g/m²)
Portrait - 3-7/8 to 11-5/8" or 98 to 297 mm
Landscape - 5-7/8 to 17" or 148 to 432 mm
Plain paper (52 to 163 g/m²)
Ledger, Legal, Oficio II, A3, B4, 216 × 340 mm, 8K
25 (80 g/m²)
Postcards
Postcards (100 × 148 mm)
20
Oufuku Hagaki (return postcard)
Return postcard (148 × 200 mm)
10
Envelopes
Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Envelope C4, Envelope #10
(Commercial #10), Envelope #9 (Commercial #9), Envelope #6
(Commercial #6 3/4), Monarch, ISO B5, Youkei 2, Youkei 4
5
Recycled paper (52 to 163 g/m²)
Colored paper (52 to 163 g/m²)
Other sizes:
Portrait — 3-7/8 to 11-5/8" or 98 to 297 mm
Landscape — 5-7/8 to 17" or 148 to 432 mm
11-10
Appendix > Paper
Basic Paper Specifications
This machine is designed to print on standard copy paper as used in regular ('dry') copiers and page printers such as
laser printers. It also supports a variety of other types of paper that conform to the specifications given in this appendix.
Be careful when choosing paper. Paper unsuitable for the machine may cause jams or may be wrinkled.
Supported Paper
Use standard copy paper for regular copiers or laser printers. The printing quality will be affected by the quality of paper.
Poor quality paper may result in unsatisfactory output.
Basic Paper Specifications
The following table lists the specifications of paper that is supported with this machine. Refer to the subsequent sections
for further details.
Criteria
Weight
Specifications
Cassettes: 52 to 163 g/m²
Multi purpose tray: 52 to 256 g/m²
Thickness
0.086 to 0.230 mm
Dimensional accuracy
±0.7 mm
Squareness of corners
90°±0.2°
Moisture content
4 to 6%
Grain direction
Long grain (paper supply direction)
Pulp content
80% or more
NOTE
Some recycled paper does not meet requirements for use with this machine as listed in the Basic Paper Specifications
shown below, such as moisture or pulp content. For this reason, we recommend purchasing a small amount of
recycled paper as a sample for testing prior to use. Choose recycled paper that gives the best printing results and
contains low levels of paper dust.
We are not responsible for the problems occurred from the use of paper that does not conform to our specifications.
Choosing the Appropriate Paper
This section describes guidelines for choosing paper.
Condition
Avoid using paper with bent corners or that is curled, dirty, or torn. Do not use paper that has a rough surface or paper
fiber lint, or that is especially delicate. Use of paper in any of these conditions will not only deliver poor copies but may
also cause jams and shorten the useful life of the machine. Choose paper with a smooth and even surface; however,
avoid coated paper or paper with a treated surface as it may damage the drum or fusing unit.
Ingredient
Do not use paper such as paper that has been coated or surface-treated or paper that contains plastic or carbon. These
paper may produce harmful fumes from the heat of printing and may damage the drum.
Be sure to use the standard paper that contains at least 80% pulp, i.e., not more than 20% of the total paper content
consists of cotton or other fibers.
11-11
Appendix > Paper
Supported Paper Sizes
Paper of the following sizes is supported by the machine.
Measurements in the table take into account a ±0.7 mm dimensional accuracy for length and width. Corner angles must
be 90°±0.2°.
Multi Purpose Tray
Cassette or Multi Purpose Tray
A6-R (105 × 148 mm)
A3 (297 × 420 mm)
B6-R (128 × 182 mm)
B4 (257 × 364 mm)
Hagaki (100×148mm)
A4 (297 × 210 mm)
Oufuku Hagaki (148 × 200 mm)
A4-R (210 × 297 mm)
Executive (7 1/4 ×10 1/2")
B5 (257 × 182 mm)
Envelope DL (110 × 220 mm)
B5-R (182 × 257 mm)
Envelope C5 (162 × 229mm)
A5-R (148 × 210 mm)
Envelope C4 (229 × 324mm)
Folio (210 × 330 mm)
ISO B5 (176 × 250 mm)
Ledger
Envelope #10 (Commercial #10) (4 1/8 × 9 1/2")
Legal
Envelope #9 (Commercial #9) (3 7/8 × 8 7/8")
Letter
Envelope #6 (Commercial #6 3/4) (3 5/8 × 6 1/2")
Letter-R
Envelope Monarch (3 7/8 ×7 1/2")
Statement-R
Youkei 2 (114 × 162 mm)
Oficio II
Youkei 4 (105 × 235 mm)
216 × 340 mm
Size Entry (98 × 148 to 297 × 432 mm)
8K (273 × 394 mm)
16K (273 × 197 mm)
16K-R (197 × 273 mm)
Smoothness
The paper surface should be smooth, but it must be uncoated. With paper that is too smooth and slippery, several
sheets may accidentally be supplied at once, causing jams.
Basis Weight
In countries that use the metric system, basis weight is the weight in grams of one sheet of paper one square meter in
area. In the United States, basis weight is the weight in pounds of one ream (500 sheets) of paper cut to the standard
size (or trade size) for a specific grade of paper. Paper that is too heavy or too light may be supplied incorrectly or cause
paper jams, which may cause excessive wear of the machine. Mixed paper weight (i.e., thickness) may cause several
sheets to be supplied at once accidentally and may also cause blurring or other printing problems if the toner fails to
adhere correctly.
Thickness
Avoid using paper that is too thick or thin. Signs that paper may be thin include frequent problems with paper jams or
with several sheets being supplied at once. Paper jams may also indicate that the paper is too thick. The proper
thickness is between 0.086 and 0.230 mm.
11-12
Appendix > Paper
Moisture Content
Paper moisture content is the ratio of moisture to dryness expressed as a percentage. Moisture affects how the paper is
supplied, the electrostatic changeability of the paper, and how the toner adheres.
Paper moisture content varies depending on the relative humidity in the room. High relative humidity causes paper to
become damp, making the edges expand so it appears wavy. Low relative humidity causes paper to lose moisture,
making the edges tighten and weakening print contrast.
Wavy or tight edges may cause the paper to slip when it is supplied. Try to keep the moisture content between 4 to 6%.
To maintain the right level of moisture content, bear in mind the following considerations.
•
Store paper in a cool, well-ventilated place.
•
Store paper flat and unopened in the package. Once the package is opened, reseal it if the paper is not to be used for
a while.
•
Store paper sealed in the original package and box. Put a pallet under the carton to keep it raised above the floor.
Especially during rainy seasons keep the paper a sufficient distance away from wooden or concrete floors.
•
Before using paper that has been stored, keep it at the proper moisture level for at least 48 hours.
•
Do not store paper where it is exposed to heat, sunlight, or dampness.
Other Paper Specifications
Porosity: The density of the paper fibers
Stiffness: Paper must be stiff enough or it may buckle in the machine, causing jams.
Curl: Most paper naturally tends to curl after the package is opened. When paper passes through the fixing unit, it curls
upward slightly. To deliver flat printouts, load the paper so that the curl faces towards the bottom of the paper tray.
Static electricity: During printing, paper is electrostatically charged so that the toner adheres. Choose paper that can
be discharged quickly so that copies do not cling together.
Whiteness: Paper whiteness affects print contrast. Use whiter paper for sharper, brighter copies.
Quality: Machine problems may occur if sheet sizes are not uniform or if corners are not square, edges are rough,
sheets are uncut, or edges or corners are crushed. In order to prevent these problems, be especially careful when you
cut the paper yourself.
Packaging: Choose paper that is properly packaged and stacked in boxes. Ideally, the packaging itself should have
been treated with a coating to inhibit moisture.
Specially treated paper: We do not recommend printing onto the following types of paper, even if it conforms to the
basic specifications. When you use these kinds of paper, purchase a small amount first as a sample to test.
•
Glossy paper
•
Watermarked paper
•
Paper with an uneven surface
•
Perforated paper
11-13
Appendix > Paper
Special Paper
This section describes printing onto special paper and print media.
The following paper and media can be used.
•
Transparencies
•
Preprinted paper
•
Bond paper
•
Recycled paper
•
Thin paper (from 52 g/m² to 64 g/m² or less)
•
Letterhead
•
Colored paper
•
Prepunched paper
•
Envelopes
•
Cardstocks (Hagaki)
•
Thick paper (from 106 g/m² to 256 g/m² or less)
•
Labels
•
High-quality paper
When using these paper and media, choose that are designed specifically for copiers or page printers (such as laser
printers). Use the multi purpose tray for transparencies, thick paper, envelopes, cardstocks, and labels.
Choosing Special Paper
Although special paper that meets the following requirements can be used with the machine, print quality will vary
considerably due to differences in the construction and quality of special paper. Thus, special paper is more likely than
regular paper to cause printing problems. Before purchasing special paper in volume, try testing a sample to ensure the
print quality is satisfactory. General precautions when printing onto special paper are given below. Note that we are not
responsible for any harm to the user or damage to the machine caused by moisture or specifications of special paper.
Select a cassette or multi purpose tray for special paper.
Transparencies
Transparencies must be able to withstand the heat of printing. Transparencies must meet the following conditions.
Heat resistance
Must withstand at least 190°C
Thickness
0.100 to 0.110 mm
Material
Polyester
Dimensional accuracy
±0.7 mm
Squareness of corners
90° ±0.2°
To avoid problems, use the multi purpose tray for transparencies and load transparencies with the long side facing the
machine.
If transparencies jam frequently at output, try pulling the leading edge of sheets gently as they are ejected.
11-14
Appendix > Paper
Label
Be sure to feed labels from the multi purpose tray.
For selecting labels, use extreme care so that the adhesive may not come in direct contact with any part of the machine
and that the labels are not easily peeled from the carrier sheet. Adhesives that stick to the drum or rollers and peeled
labels remaining in the machine may cause a failure.
When printing onto labels, you must be liable for the print quality and possible trouble.
Top sheet
Adhesive layer
Carrier sheet
Labels consist of three layers as shown in the illustration. The adhesive layer contains materials that are easily affected
by the force applied in the machine. The carrier sheet bears the top sheet until the label is used. This composition of
labels may cause more problems.
The label surface must be covered completely with the top sheet. Gaps between labels may cause peeling of labels,
resulting in a serious failure.
Some label paper has large margins on the top sheet. When using such paper, do not peel these margins from the
carrier sheet before completing output.
Allowed
Not allowed
Top sheet
Carrier sheet
Use label paper that conforms to the following specifications.
Top sheet weight
44 to 74 g/m²
Basis weight (overall paper weight)
104 to 151 g/m²
Top sheet thickness
0.086 to 0.107 mm
Overall paper thickness
0.115 to 0.160 mm
Moisture content
4 to 6 % (composite)
11-15
Appendix > Paper
Hagaki
Burrs
Burrs
Before loading Hagaki into the multi purpose tray, fan them and align the edges. If the Hagaki paper is curled, straighten
it before loading. Printing onto curled Hagaki may cause jams.
Use unfolded Oufuku Hagaki (available at post offices). Some Hagaki may still have rough edges developed by a paper
cutter on the back side. Remove any such rough edges by placing the Hagaki on a flat surface and rubbing the edges
gently a few times with a ruler.
Envelopes
Use the multi purpose tray for envelopes.
Due to the structure of envelopes, printing evenly over the entire surface may not be possible in some cases. Thin
envelopes in particular may be wrinkled by the machine in some cases as they pass through. Before purchasing
envelopes in volume, try testing a sample to ensure the print quality.
Storing envelopes for a long period may cause them to become wrinkled. Thus, keep the package sealed until you are
ready to use them.
Keep the following points in mind.
•
Do not use envelopes with exposed adhesive. In addition, do not use the type of envelope in which the adhesive is
exposed after the top layer is peeled off. Serious damage may be caused if the paper covering the adhesive comes
off in the machine.
•
Do not use envelopes with certain special features. For example, do not use envelopes with a grommet for winding a
string to close the flap or envelopes with an open or film-covered window.
•
If paper jams occur, load fewer envelopes at once.
Thick Paper
Before loading thick paper in the multi purpose tray, fan it and align the edges. Some thick paper may still have rough
edges developed by a paper cutter on the back side. Remove any such rough edges just as with Hagaki by placing the
paper on a flat surface and rubbing the edges gently a few times with a ruler. Printing onto paper with rough edges may
cause jams
NOTE
If the paper is not supplied correctly even after it is smoothed, load the paper in the multi purpose tray with the leading
edge raised a few millimeters.
Colored Paper
Colored paper must conform to the specifications listed on the page 11-11. In addition, the pigments in the paper must
be able to withstand the heat of printing (up to 200°C or 392°F).
Preprinted Paper
Preprinted paper must conform to the specifications listed on the page 11-11. The colored ink must be able to withstand
the heat of printing. It must be resistant to silicone oil as well. Do not use paper with a treated surface such as glossy
paper used for calendars.
11-16
Appendix > Paper
Recycled Paper
Recycled paper must conform to the specifications listed on the page 11-11; however, its whiteness may be considered
separately.
NOTE
Before purchasing recycled paper in volume, try testing a sample to ensure that the print quality.
11-17
Appendix > Specifications
Specifications
IMPORTANT
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Machine
Item
Description
25 ppm model
30 ppm model
Type
Desktop
Printing Method
Electrophotography by semiconductor laser, single drum system
Supported Original Types
Sheet, Book, 3-dimensional objects (maximum original size: Ledger/A3)
Original Feed System
Fixed
Paper Weight
52 to 163 g/m²
Cassette
Multi Purpose Tray
52 to 256 g/m² (Letter/A4 or less),
52 to 163 g/m² (more than Letter/A4)
Media Type
Paper Size
Cassette
Plain, Rough, Vellum, Recycled, Preprinted, Bond, Color, Prepunched, Letterhead,
Thick, High Quality, Custom 1 to 8 (Duplex: Same as Simplex)
Multi Purpose Tray
Plain, Transparency (OHP film), Rough, Vellum, Labels, Recycled, Preprinted, Bond,
Cardstock, Color, Prepunched, Letterhead, Thick, Envelope, High Quality, Custom 1 to
8
Cassette
Ledger, Letter-R, Letter, Legal, Statement-R, Oficio II, A3, A4-R, A4, A5-R, B4, B5-R,
B5, Folio, 216 × 340 mm, 8K, 16K-R, 16K
Multi Purpose Tray
Maximum: Ledger/A3
Minimum: Statement-R/A6-R
Zoom Level
Manual mode: 25 to 400%, 1% increments
Auto mode: Preset Zoom
Printing Speed
Letter/A4: 25 sheets/min
Letter/A4: 30 sheets/min
Letter-R/A4-R: 18 sheets/min
Letter-R/A4-R: 22 sheets/min
Ledger/A3: 12 sheets/min
Ledger/A3: 15 sheets/min
Legal/B4: 12 sheets/min
Legal/B4: 15 sheets/min
B5: 25 sheets/min
B5: 30 sheets/min
B5-R: 16 sheets/min
B5-R: 20 sheets/min
A5-R: 16 sheets/min
A5-R: 15 sheets/min
First Print Time (A4, feed from Cassette)
10 seconds or less
Warm-up Time
Power on
20 seconds or less
(22°C/71.6°F,
60%)
Sleep
20 seconds or less
Paper Capacity
Cassette
500 sheets (80 g/m²)
Multi Purpose Tray
100 sheets (80 g/m², Letter/A4 or less),
25 sheets (80 g/m², more than Letter/A4)
Output Tray
Capacity
Inner Tray
250 sheets (80 g/m²)
Job Separator
150 sheets (80 g/m²)
11-18
Appendix > Specifications
Item
Description
25 ppm model
30 ppm model
Continuous Copying
1 to 999 sheets
Image Write System
Semiconductor laser and electrophotography
Main Memory
Interface
Standard
512 MB
Maximum
1536 MB
Standard
USB Interface Connector: 1 (USB Hi-Speed)
USB memory slot: 2 (USB Hi-Speed)
Network interface: 1 (10 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX/1000 BASE-T)
Option
Resolution
Operating
Environment
eKUIO: 2
600×600 dpi
Temperature
10 to 32.5°C/50 to 90.5°F
Humidity
15 to 80 %
Altitude
2,500 m/8,202 ft maximum
Brightness
1,500 lux maximum
Dimension (W × D × H)
Model with standard document processor:
23-1/4×23-1/4×26-15/16", 590×590×685 mm
23-1/4×23-1/4×26-15/16",
590×590×685 mm
Model with standard original cover:
23-1/4×23-1/4×23-1/16", 590×590×586.5 mm
Weight
Model with standard document processor:
Approx. 114.84 lb/Approx. 52.2 kg
Approx. 114.84 lb/Approx. 52.2 kg
Model with standard original cover:
Approx. 102.3 lb/Approx. 46.5 kg
Space Required (W × D)
34-9/16×23-1/4", 878×590 mm (Using multi purpose tray)
Power Source
120 V Specification Model:120 V (60 Hz, 10.9 A)
230 V Specification Model: 220 to 240V (50 Hz/ 60 Hz, 5.8 A)
Options
Paper feeder (single cassette), Paper feeder (double cassette), Document finisher, FAX
kit, Expansion memory, Gigabit Ethernet Board, Card Authentication Kit
Printer
Item
Description
Printing Speed
Same as Copying Speed.
First Print Time (A4, feed from Cassette)
10.0 seconds or less
Resolution
600×600 dpi
Operating System
Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, Windows Vista, Windows 7,
Windows Server 2008, Apple Macintosh OS X
Interface
USB Interface Connector: 1 (USB Hi-Speed)
Network interface: 1 (10 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX/1000 BASE-T)
Page Description Language
PRESCRIBE
11-19
Appendix > Specifications
Scanner
Item
System requirements
Description
CPU: 600 Mhz or higher
RAM: 128 MB or more
Resolution
600 dpi, 400 dpi, 300 dpi, 200 dpi, 200×100 dpi, 200×400 dpi (Resolution
in FAX mode included)
File Format
TIFF (MMR/JPEG compression), JPEG, XPS, PDF (MMR/JPEG
compression),
Scanning Speed*
(A4 landscape, 300 dpi, Image quality: Text/Photo original)
1-sided B/W 40 Images/min, Color 20 Images/min
Interface
Ethernet (10 BASE-T/100 BASE-T%$6(7)
Network Protocol
TCP/IP
Transmission System
PC transmission
SMB: Scan to SMB
FTP: Scan to FTP, FTP over SSL
E-mail
transmission
SMTP: Scan to E-mail
TWAIN scan**
WIA scan***
*
When using the dual scan document processor (except TWAIN and WIA scanning)
** Available Operating System: Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows Server 2008
*** Available Operating System: Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows Server 2008
Document Processor
Item
Description
Original Feed Method
Automatic feed
Supported Original Types
Sheet originals
Paper Size
Maximum: Ledger/A3, Minimum: Statement-R/A5-R
Paper Weight
45 to 160 g/m²
Loading Capacity
50 sheets (50 to 80 g/m²) maximum
Mixed original sizes (auto selection): 30 sheets (50 to 80 g/m²) maximum
Dimensions (W) × (D) × (H)
23-1/4×19-1/4×4-7/8"
590×489×123 mm
Weight
Approx. 15.4 lb or less/Approx. 7 kg or less
Paper Feeder (single cassette) (option)
Item
Description
Paper Supply Method
Friction Feed (No. Sheets: 500, 80 g/m², 1 cassette)
Paper Size
Ledger, Letter-R, Letter, Legal, Statement-R, Oficio II, A3, A4-R, A4, A5R, B4, B5-R, B5, Folio, 216 × 340 mm, 8K, 16K-R, 16K
11-20
Appendix > Specifications
Item
Supported Paper
Description
Paper weight: 52 - 163 g/m²
Media types: standard, recycled, color
Dimensions (W) × (D) × (H)
23-1/4×23-3/16×13-7/8"
590×589×352 mm
Weight
Approx. 46 lb/ Approx. 21 kg
Paper Feeder (double cassette) (option)
Item
Description
Paper Supply Method
Friction Feed (No. Sheets: 500, 80 g/m², 2 cassette)
Paper Size
Ledger, Letter-R, Letter, Legal, Statement-R, Oficio II, A3, A4-R, A4, A5R, B4, B5-R, B5, Folio, 216 × 340 mm, 8K, 16K-R, 16K
Supported Paper
Paper weight: 52 - 163 g/m²
Media types: standard, recycled, color
Dimensions (W) × (D) × (H)
23-1/4×23-3/16×13-7/8"
590×589×352 mm
Weight
Approx. 46 lb/ Approx. 21 kg
Document Finisher (option)
Item
Description
Number of Trays
1 tray
Paper Size (Non-stapling)
Ledger, Legal, Oficio II, A3, B4, Folio, 216 × 340 mm, 8K: 250 sheets
Letter, Letter-R, Executive-R, Statement-R, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, A5-R,
16K: 500 sheets
Supported Paper Weight
52 to 256 g/m² (Stapling: 90 g/m² or less)
Maximum Sheets for Stapling
Ledger, Legal, Oficio II, A3, B4, 216 × 340 mm, 8K: 25 sheets
Letter, Letter-R, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, 16K: 50 sheets
(Paper weight 90 g/m² or less)
Dimensions (W) × (D) × (H)
16-3/8×20-1/2×10-7/8"
416×521×275.5 mm
Weight
Approx. 26.4 lb/Approx. 12 kg
11-21
Appendix > Specifications
Environmental Specifications
Item
Description
Recovery time from Low Power Mode
10 seconds or less
Time to Low Power Mode
1 minute
Recovery time from sleep
20 seconds or less
Time to sleep
1 minute
Duplexing
Standard
NOTE
Consult your dealer or service representative for recommended paper types.
11-22
Appendix > Glossary
Glossary
AppleTalk
AppleTalk, which comes with Apple Computer's Mac OS, is a network protocol. AppleTalk enables file/printer sharing and
also enables you to utilize application software that is on another computer on the same AppleTalk network.
Auto Form Feed Timeout
During data transmission, the machine may sometimes have to wait until receiving the next data. This is the auto form
feed timeout. When the preset timeout passes, the machine automatically put paper out. However, no output is performed
if the last page has no data to be printed.
Auto-IP
Auto-IP is a module that enables dynamic IPv4 addresses to be assigned to a device on startup. However, DHCP requires
a DHCP server. Auto-IP is a server-less method of choosing an IP address. IP addresses between 169.254.0.0 to
169.254.255.255 are reserved for Auto-IP and assinged automatically.
Auto Paper Selection
A function to automatically select paper in the same size as original at printing
Auto Sleep
A mode designed for electrical power saving, activated when the machine is left unused or data transfer for a specific
period. In Sleep mode, power consumption is kept to a minimum.
Bonjour
Bonjour, also known as zero-configuration networking, is a service that automatically detects computers, devices and
services on an IP network. Bonjour, because an industry-standard IP protocol is used, allows devices to automatically
recognize each other without an IP address being specified or DNS server being set. Bonjour also sends and receives
network packets by UDP port 5353. If a firewall is enabled, the user must check that UDP port 5353 is left open so that
Bonjour will run correctly. Some firewalls are set up so as to reject only certain Bonjour packets. If Bonjour does not run
stably, check the firewall settings and ensure that Bonjour is registered on the exceptions list and that Bonjour packets
are accepted. If you install Bonjour on Windows XP Service Pack 2 or later, the Windows firewall will be set up correctly
for Bonjour.
Default Gateway
This indicates the device, such as a computer or router, that serves as the entrance/exit (gateway) for accessing
computers outside the network that you are on, When no specific gateway is designated for a destination IP address, data
is sent to the host designated as the Default Gateway.
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol)
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) that automatically resolves IP addresses, subnet masks, and gateway
addresses on a TCP/IP network. DHCP minimizes the load of network management employing a large number of client
computers because it relieves individual clients including printers from the IP address being assigned.
DHCP (IPv6)
DHCP (IPv6) is the next-generation of the Internet's Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol and supports IPv6. It extends
the BOOTP startup protocol that defines the protocols used for transferring configuration information to hosts on the
11-23
Appendix > Glossary
network. DHCP (IPv6) permits the DHCP server to use its expanded functionality to send configuration parameters to an
IPv6 node. Because the network addresses that can be used are allocated automatically, the IPv6 node management
workload is reduced in systems where the administrator has to exercise close control over IP address allocation.
dpi (dots per inch)
A unit for resolution, representing the number of dots printed per inch (25.4 mm).
EcoPrint Mode
A printing mode that helps save toner. Copies made in this mode are thus lighter than normal.
Emulation
The function to interpret and execute other printers' page description languages. The machine emulates operation of
PCL6, KPDL, and KPDL (automatic).
FTP (File Transfer Protocol)
A protocol to transfer files on the TCP/IP network, whether the Internet or an intranet. Along with HTTP and SMTP/POP,
FTP is now frequently used on the Internet.
Grayscale
A computer color expression. Displayed images of this sort are typically composed of shades of gray, varying from black
at the weakest intensity to white at the strongest, without any other colors. Gray levels are displayed in numerical levels:
that is, white and black only for 1 bit; 256 gray levels (including white and black) for 8 bits; and 65,536 gray levels for 16
bits.
Help
A ? (Help) key is provided on this machine's operation panel. If you are unsure of how to operate the machine, would like
more information on its functions or are having problems getting the machine to work properly, press the ? (Help) key to
view a detailed explanation on the touch panel.
IP Address
An Internet protocol address is a unique number that represents a specific computer or related device on the network.
The format of an IP address is four sets of numbers separated by dots, e.g. 192.168.110.171. Each number should be
between 0 and 255.
IPP
IPP (Internet Printing Protocol) is a standard that uses TCP/IP networks such as the Internet to enable print jobs to be
sent between remote computers and printers.IPP is an extension of the HTTP protocol used to view websites and enables
printing to be carried out via routers on printers in remote locations. It also supports the HTTP authentication mechanisms
along with SSL server and client authentication as well as encryption.
KPDL (Kyocera Page Description Language)
Kyocera's PostScript page description language compatible with Adobe PostScript Level 3.
11-24
Appendix > Glossary
Multi Purpose (MP) Tray
The paper supply tray on the right side of the machine. Use this tray instead of the cassettes when printing onto
envelopes, Hagaki, transparencies, or labels.
NetBEUI (NetBIOS Extended User Interface)
An interface, developed by IBM in 1985, as an update from NetBIOS. It enables more advanced functions on smaller
networks than other protocols such as TCP/IP, etc. It is not suitable for larger networks due to lack of routing capabilities
to choose the most appropriate routes. NetBEUI has been adopted by IBM for its OS/2 and Microsoft for its Windows as
a standard protocol for file sharing and printing services.
NetWare
Novell's network management software that is able to run on a variety of operating systems.
PDF/A
This is "ISO 19005-1. Document management - Electronic document file format for long-term preservation - Part 1: Use
of PDF (PDF/A)", and is a file format based on PDF 1.4. It has been standardized as ISO 19005-1, and is a specialization
of PDF, which has been mainly used for printing, for long-term storage. A new part, ISO 19005-2 (PDF/A-2), is currently
being prepared.
POP3 (Post Office Protocol 3)
A standard protocol to receive E-mail from the server in which the mail is stored on the Internet or an intranet.
PostScript
A page description language developed by Adobe Systems. It enables flexible font functions and highly-functional
graphics, allowing higher quality printing. The first version called Level 1 was launched in 1985, followed by Level 2 that
enabled color printing and two-byte languages (e.g. Japanese) in 1990. In 1996, Level 3 was released as an update for
the Internet access and PDF format as well as gradual improvements in implementation technologies.
PPM (prints per minute)
This indicates the number of A4 size printouts made in one minute.
Printer Driver
The software to enable you to print data created on any application software. The printer driver for the machine is
contained in the CD-ROM enclosed in the package. Install the printer driver on the computer connected to the machine.
RA (Stateless)
The IPv6 router communicates (transmits) information such as the global address prefix using ICMPv6. This information
is the Router Advertisement (RA). ICMPv6 stands for Internet Control Message Protocol, and is a IPv6 standard defined
in the RFC 2463 "Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMPv6) for the Internet Protocol Version 6 (IPv6) Specification".
Send as E-mail
A function to send the image data stored in the machine as an E-mail attachment. E-mail addresses can be selected from
the list or entered at each time.
11-25
Appendix > Glossary
SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol)
A protocol for E-mail transmission over the Internet or an intranet. It is used for transferring mail between mail servers as
well as for sending mail from clients to their servers.
Status Page
The page lists machine conditions, such as the memory capacity, total number of prints and scans, and paper source
settings.
Subnet Mask
The subnet mask is a way of augmenting the network address section of an IP address. A subnet mask represents all
network address sections as 1 and all host address sections as 0. The number of bits in the prefix indicates the length of
the network address. The term "prefix" refers to something added to the beginning and, in this context, indicates the first
section of the IP address. When an IP address is written, the length of the network address is indicated by the prefix length
after a forward slash (/). For example, "24" in the address "133.210.2.0/24". In this way, "133.210.2.0/24" denotes the IP
address "133.210.2.0" with a 24-bit prefix (network section). This new network address section (originally part of the host
address) made possible by the subnet mask is referred to as the subnet address.When you enter the subnet mask, be
sure to set the DHCP setting to Off.
TCP/IP (Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol)
TCP/IP is a suite of protocols designed to define the way computers and other devices communicate with each other over
a network.
TCP/IP (IPv6)
TCP/IP (IPv6) is based on the current Internet protocol, TCP/IP (IPv4). IPv6 is the next-generation Internet protocol and
expands the available address space, which resolves the problem of the lack of addresses under IPv4, while also
introducing other improvements such as additional security functionality and the capacity to prioritize data transmission.
TWAIN (Technology Without Any Interested Name)
A technical specification for connecting scanners, digital cameras, and other image equipment to the computers. The
TWAIN compatible devices enable you to process image data on any relevant application software. TWAIN is adopted
on a large amount of graphic software (e.g. Adobe Photoshop) and OCR software.
USB (Universal Serial Bus)2.0
A USB interface standard for Hi-Speed USB 2.0. The maximum transfer rate is 480 Mbps. This machine is equipped with
USB 2.0 for high-speed data transfer.
WIA (Windows Imaging Acquisition)
A function to import images supported after Windows Me/XP from digital cameras and other peripheral devices.This
function replaces what TWAIN used to do; the feature is provided as a part of Windows functions and improves ease of
operation, so that you import images directly to My Computer without using any application.
11-26
Index
Numerics
2-sided/Book Original 3-36
A
Accessibility 11-23
Address Book
Adding a Contact 6-24
Adding a Group 6-28
Editing and Deleting 6-31
Adjustment/Maintenance
Auto Color Correction 9-23
Auto Drum Refresh 9-24
Background Density Adj. 9-23
Correcting Black Line 9-23
Density Adjustment 9-22
Display Brightness 9-23
DP Adjustment 9-24
Drum Refresh 1 9-24
Drum Refresh 2 9-24
Gray Adjustment 9-24
Print Density 9-23
Toner Save Level (EcoPrint) 9-23
AppleTalk 11-23
Setup 9-19
Applications 11-5
Auto Form Feed Timeout 11-23
Auto Image Rotation 4-16
Auto-IP 11-23
Setup 9-17
Automatic 2-Sided Copy Function 1-12
Auto Paper Selection 11-23
Auto Sleep 2-21, 11-23
B
Background Density Adjust 3-53
Bonjour 11-23
Setup 9-17
C
Cassette 2-2
Loading Paper 3-3
Paper Size and Media Type 3-25, 9-8
Character Entry Method 11-7
Checking the Counter 3-11
Cleaning
Document Processor 10-6
Glass Platen 10-6
Original Cover 10-6
Cleaning Cloth 2-3
Collate/Offset 3-42
Color Selection 3-58
Combine 4-12
2 in 1 4-12
4 in 1 4-12
Border Line 4-12
COMMAND CENTER 2-23
Connecting
LAN Cable 2-10
Power Cable 2-11
USB Cable 2-11
Connection Method 2-8
Continuous Scan 3-38
Conventions in This Guide 1-13
Copying 4-1
Copying Settings
Auto % Priority 9-15
Auto Paper Selection 9-15
Reserve Next Priority 9-15
D
Date/Timer 2-22, 9-21
Auto Error Clear 9-22
Auto Panel Reset 9-21
Auto Sleep 9-21
Date/Timer 9-21
Date Format 9-21
Error Clear Timer 9-22
Interrupt Clear Timer 9-22
Low Power Timer 9-22
Panel Reset Timer 9-22
Sleep Level 9-22
Sleep Timer 9-22
Time Zone 9-21
Default
Auto Image Rotation 9-12
Background Density Adj. 9-12
Collate/Offset 9-12
Color Selection 9-12
Continuous Scan 9-12
EcoPrint 9-12
E-mail Subject/Body 9-13
File Format 9-12
File Name Entry 9-13
File Separation 9-12
FTP Encrypted TX 9-13
Image Quality 9-13
JPEG/TIFF Print 9-13
Margin 9-12
Original Image 9-12
Original Orientation 9-12
PDF/A Setting 9-13
Prevent Bleed-through 9-12
Scan Resolution 9-12
XPS Fit to Page 9-13
Zoom 9-12
Default Gateway 11-23
Setup 9-17
Default Screen 9-9
Density 3-49
Index-1
Destination 6-15
Checking and Editing 6-22
Choosing by One Touch Key 6-17
Choosing from the Address Book 6-15
Dest. Check before Send 9-15
Entering a New E-mail Address 6-18
Entry Check for New Dest. 9-15
Multi Sending 6-23
Specifying a New PC Folder 6-19
Device Status 8-11
FAX 8-12
Printer 8-11
Scanner 8-11
USB Memory 8-12
DHCP 11-23
Setup 9-17
DHCP (IPv6) 11-24
Setup 9-18
Document Processor 2-2
dpi 11-24
Duplex 4-8
E
EcoPrint 11-24
Copy 4-15
Printer 9-16
Emulation 11-24
Selection 9-16
Encrypted PDF Password 7-11
Energy Saving Control Function 1-12
Energy Star Program 1-12
Enhanced WSD 9-20
Environment 1-3
Error Handling 9-14
Expansion Memory 11-3
F
Favorites 3-14
Editing and Deleting 3-17
Registering 3-14
Using 3-19
FAX Kit 11-3
File Format 3-56
File Name Entry 3-61
File Separation 6-39
First Print Time 11-18, 11-19
Front Cover 2-2
FTP 11-24
FTP Client (Transmission)
Protocol Detail 9-18
FTP Encrypted TX 6-41
FTP Server (Reception)
Protocol Detail 9-18
G
Glossary 11-23
GPL/LGPL 1-9
Gray Adjustment 9-24
Grayscale 3-58, 11-24
H
Handles 2-2, 2-4
Help 11-24
Help Screen 3-27
Host Name 9-17
HTTP
Protocol Detail 9-18
HTTPS
Protocol Detail 9-19
HTTP Security 9-20
I
Inner Tray 2-2
Interface Block 9-21
Interrupt Copy 4-17
IP Address 11-24
Setup 9-17
IPP
Protocol Detail 9-19
IPP over SSL
Protocol Detail 9-19
IPP Security 9-20
IPSec
Setup 9-20
J
Job
Canceling 3-28
Checking History 8-6
Checking Status 8-2
Details of the Status Screens 8-3
Pause and Resumption 8-3
Sending the Log History 8-7
Job Accounting 9-50
Adding an Account 9-55
Counting the Number of Pages Printed 9-61
Default Setting 9-64
Editing and Deleting 9-57
Enabling/Disabling 9-53
Login 9-54
Logout 9-54
Printing an Accounting Report 9-63
Restricting the Use of the Machine 9-59
Job Box 5-4
Automatic Delete Setting for Temporary Documents
5-9
Private Print/Stored Job Box 5-4
Quick Copy/Proof and Hold Print Box 5-6
Job Finish Notice 3-59
Job Separator 2-2
JPEG/TIFF Print 7-12
K
Keyboard Layout 9-14
KPDL 11-24
L
Language 9-5
LAN Interface 9-20
Index-2
LDAP
Protocol Detail 9-18
LDAP Security 9-20
Legal Information 1-9
Legal Restriction on Copying 1-8
Legal Restriction on Scanning 1-8
Login 3-12, 9-54
Logout 3-13, 9-54
Low Power Mode 2-20
LPD
Protocol Detail 9-18
M
Machine Setup Wizard 2-22
Main Power Switch 2-4
Manual Setting (IPv6) 9-18
Margin 3-44
Measurement 9-14
Mixed Size Originals 3-34
Monotype Imaging License Agreement 1-11
Multi Purpose Tray 2-3, 11-25
Loading Paper 3-5
Paper Size and Media Type 3-25, 9-8
Multi Sending 6-23
N
NetBEUI 11-25
Protocol Detail 9-18
NetWare 11-25
Setup 9-19
Network
Preparing 2-8
Setup 2-22, 9-17
Network Cable
Connecting 2-10
Network Interface 2-4, 2-9
O
One Touch Key 6-33
Adding a Destination 6-33
Editing and Deleting 6-35
Open SSL License 1-9
Operation Panel 2-2, 2-6
Option
Card Authentication Kit 11-4
Document Finisher 11-3
Expansion Memory 11-3
FAX Kit 11-3
Gigabit Ethernet Board 11-5
Overview 11-2
Paper Feeder (double cassette) 11-3
Paper Feeder (single cassette) 11-3
Optional Function 11-5
Optional Memory 9-21
Option Interface 2-4
Original Cover 2-2
Original Image 3-51
Original Loaded Indicator 2-3
Original Orientation 3-33
Originals
Custom Original Size 9-9
Loading Originals 3-7
Original Auto Detect 9-10
Original Size 3-31
Original Size 3-31
Original Size Indicator Plates 2-2
Original SSLeay License 1-10
Original Table 2-3
Original Width Guides 2-3
P
Paper
Appropriate Paper 11-11
Before Loading 3-2
Cassette 9-8
Checking the Remaining Amount of Paper 8-13
Custom Paper Size 9-10
Default Paper Source 9-10
Loading Envelopes 3-6
Loading in the Cassettes 3-3
Loading in the Multi Purpose Tray 3-5
Media for Auto 9-10
Media Type Setting 9-10
Multi Purpose Tray 9-8
Setup 9-10
Size and Media 3-25, 9-8
Special Paper 11-14
Special Paper Action 9-11
Specifications 11-11
Paper Feeder (double cassette) 11-3
Paper Feeder (single cassette) 11-3
Paper Feed Mode 9-16
Paper Length Guide 2-3
Paper Output 3-41, 9-13
Paper Selection 3-40
Paper Width Guide 2-3
Part Names 2-2
PDF/A 11-25
Platen 2-2
POP3 11-25
POP3 (E-mail RX)
Protocol Detail 9-18
PostScript 11-25
Power Cable
Connecting 2-11
Power Off 2-12
Power On 2-12
PPM 11-25
Precautions for Use 1-3
Preparing Cables 2-9
Prevent Bleed-through 3-54
Printer Driver 11-25
Installing 2-14
Index-3
Printer Settings
Copies 9-16
CR Action 9-16
Duplex 9-16
EcoPrint 9-16
Emulation 9-16
Form Feed TimeOut 9-16
KIR 9-17
LF Action 9-16
Orientation 9-16
Override A4/Letter 9-16
Paper Feed Mode 9-16
Resolution 9-17
Wide A4 9-16
Printing 5-1
Printing Speed 11-18, 11-19
Priority Override 3-62
Q
Quick Setup Wizard 3-25
R
RA (Stateless) 11-25
Setup 9-18
Raw Port
Protocol Detail 9-19
Recycled Paper 1-12, 11-17
Regarding Trade Names 1-9
Replacing Staples 10-5
Report Print 9-5
Account List 9-6
Font List 9-5
Network Status 9-5
Service Status 9-6
Status Page 9-5
Resolution 9-17, 11-19
Restart 9-4
Result Report Settings 9-6
Right Cover 2-2
S
Safety Conventions in This Guide 1-2
Scan Resolution 3-50
Secure Protocol 9-20
Send as E-mail 6-2, 11-25
E-mail Subject/Body 6-40
Sending 6-1
Preparation for Sending a Document to a PC 6-5
Send as E-mail 6-2
Send to Folder (SMB/FTP) 6-2
Sending E-mail 2-24
Sending Size 6-37
Send Settings
Color TIFF Compression 9-15
Default Screen 9-15
Dest. Check before Send 9-15
Entry Check for New Dest. 9-15
Send and Forward 9-15
Sharpness 3-52
Shortcuts
Editing and Deleting 3-23
Registering 3-21
Using 3-24
Sleep 2-21
Slit Glass 2-2
SMB Client (Transmission)
Protocol Detail 9-18
SMTP 11-26
SMTP (E-mail TX)
Protocol Detail 9-18
SNMP
Protocol Detail 9-18
SNMPv3
Protocol Detail 9-18
Solving Malfunctions 10-8
Sound 9-9
Specifications
Document Finisher 11-21
Document Processor 11-20
Environmental Specifications 11-22
Machine 11-18
Paper Feeder (double cassette) 11-21
Paper Feeder (single cassette) 11-20
Printer 11-19
Scanner 11-20
Staple 3-47
Status 11-26
Status/Job Cancel 8-1
Status Page 11-26
Storing Size 7-14
Subnet Mask 11-26
Setup 9-17
Symbols 1-2
System Menu 9-2
T
TCP/IP 11-26
TCP/IP (IPv4)
Setup 9-17
TCP/IP (IPv6) 11-26
ThinPrint
Protocol Detail 9-19
ThinPrintOverSSL
Protocol Detail 9-19
Toner Container 2-3
Checking the Remaining Amount of Toner 8-13
Replacement 10-2
Touch Panel 2-7
TWAIN 11-26
Setting TWAIN Driver 2-18
U
Unknown Login User Name Job 9-66
USB 11-26
USB Cable
Connecting 2-11
USB Interface 2-4, 2-9
USB Keyboard Type 9-15
Index-4
USB Memory
Printing Documents 7-2
Removing 7-8
Saving Documents 7-5
USB Memory Slot 2-2
User Login Administration 9-25
Adding a User 9-30
Editing and Deleting 9-35
Enabling/Disabling 9-27
Group Authorization 9-44
Local User Authorization 9-29
My Panel 9-34
Obtain Network User Property 9-48
Simple Login 9-38
User Property 9-7
W
Waste Toner Box 2-3
Replacement 10-4
WIA 11-26
Setting WIA Driver 2-19
WSD Print
Setup 9-19
WSD Scan
Setup 9-19
X
XPS Fit to Page 7-13
Z
Zoom
Copy 4-5
Send/Store 3-55
Pat
er
s
s
t
r
aat106108
2300T
ur
nhout
T
el
:
014/
42.
55.
99
i
nf
o@v
anmec
hel
en.
be
www.
v
anmec
hel
en.
be
F
ax
:
014/
42.
32.
64
Index-5
Index-6
First Edition 2010.12
2K3KMEN000
Download PDF
Similar pages